EFCOG Best Practice #178
Best Practice Title: Adoption of NFPA 70 2014 in place of NFPA 70 2011
Facility: DOE Complex
Point of Contact: Andrew Drutel, PE, Savannah River Site, 803-952-9380,
andrew.drutel@srs.gov (Primary contact)
Michael Hicks NE-Idaho, 208-526-3724, hicksmd@id.doe.gov
John McAlhaney, PE, Savannah River Site, 803-557-9002, jackie.mcalhaney@srs.gov
Brief Description of Best Practice: NFPA 70 2014 is recommended for approval across the
DOE Complex as an upgrade to NFPA 70 2011 in 10 CFR 851 Worker Safety and Health Plans
(WSHP).
Why the best practice was used: 10 CFR 851 lists safety and health consensus standards with
which the contractor must comply when applicable with site hazards (851.23). Only the versions
of consensus standards that were in effect on February 9, 2006 were promulgated pursuant to
rulemaking therefore only those specifically cited versions are required by the Rule. Contractors
may include successor versions of the consensus standards that provide equal or greater worker
protection if included in their DOE-approved worker safety and health program.
What are the benefits of the best practice: The use of NFPA 70 2014 is at least as protective
as the 2011 edition, and even more protective in some areas, such that the new edition should be
considered for DOE Complex wide acceptance. NFPA 70 2014 is recommended for approval
across the DOE Complex as an upgrade to NFPA 70 2011.
What problems/issues were associated with the best practice: There were no issues associated
with this gap analysis. Adoption of the 2014 Edition of NFPA 70 provides a level of protection
“As Safe or Safer” than the 2011 version.
How the success of the Best Practice was measured: N/A
Description of process experience using the Best Practice: At the time this analysis was
performed, process experience did not exist. .
Page 1 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Date
08/18/2014
Code/Standard Title: NFPA 70® – National Electrical Code®
10CFR851 UPGRADE EVALUATION
TITLE: Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Note:
National Fire Protection Association ®, NFPA ®, NFPA 70®, National Electrical Code ®, NEC ®, National Electrical
Safety Code®, NESC® are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA.
Page 2 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
1. DESCRIPTION
10 CFR 851 - “DOE Worker Health and Safety Program” requires that the 2005 edition of NFPA
70 - “National Electrical Code” (NEC) be utilized. The purpose of this evaluation is to
document the acceptability of the changes introduced in 2014 edition of NFPA 70 as compared
to the 2011 edition and to identify and evaluate the impact of the changes to the safety and health
of workers. 2008 and 2011 editions of NFPA 70 were reviewed separately.
The sections of the NEC that deal strictly with residential systems or systems not in use at in
industrial applications are not included in this evaluation. Furthermore, a majority of editorial
changes, clarifications, additions of definitions, rearrangement of sections and related crossreference revisions, or changes related to bringing the code in alignment with the NEC Style
Manual are not considered to have an impact on safety and, therefore, are in most cases not
included in this evaluation. No Informational Notes and no Informative Annexes were evaluated
as they are not part of the Code text and have no enforceable meaning.
2. TECHNICAL JUSTIFICATION
The attached comparison was prepared by Andrew Drutel and reviewed by Jackie McAlhaney.
The review identified no detrimental impacts to worker safety and health and concluded that the
use of the 2014 edition of NFPA 70 is as protective to the worker as the 2008 and 2011 editions.
Attachment #4 provides comparisons of changes that were made to 2011 Edition of NEC in 2014
Edition of the code. Each line item listed in the “Comparison Table” has been reviewed and rated
for the impact on worker safety. A rating of “1” (editorial), “2” (technical improvement), or “3”
(potential safety consequence) has been assigned for each item. Any item with a ranking of “3”
requires additional justification. Examples of the three ratings are provided below.
1. Editorial Change – No impact to worker health or safety
Example: Adding a metrication reference.
2. Technical Improvement – Addition, enhancement, or change in methodology or
acceptance criteria that does not degrade worker safety when compared to the previous
edition.
Example: Adding requirements for equipment grounding for lighting switches supplied
by a general purpose branch circuit.
3. Potential Safety Consequence – Changes or revisions that potentially make the electrical
installation less robust and could affect personnel safety. A ranking of “3” requires
additional justification or further action.
Example: Change in an overcurrent protection of a conductor or equipment which could
result in reduced margin of safety.
In some cases text of a particular revised section was truncated, capturing only portion of the text
relevant to a particular change.
The changes are depicted as follows:
 Text shown in strikethrough font represents portions of the code which were deleted,
Page 3 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions

Underlined font represents new text being added to the code.
3. CONCLUSION
As demonstrated in Attachment #4, there have been no changes made to the NFPA 70, National
Electrical Code in the 2014 Edition that could present adverse impact to worker health or safety
(rated “3”, as described above). Furthermore, the provisions of the 2014 edition are at least as
protective as the edition specified in 10 CFR 851 (NFPA 70-2005) , NFPA 70-2008, and NFPA
70-2011.
4. COST IMPACT
The provisions of the NFPA 70, National Electrical Code are not retroactive; therefore, no cost
impact related to implementation of the new editions of the code is anticipated. Some of the
changes may affect future installations; however, the costs of design, construction, and startup
testing will be factored in during the project development stage.
Cost of implementing the requirement for sealing certain types of engineering documents by a
Professional Engineer, addressed in 5. Notes, Items 1 and 2, below, is considered to be
negligible.
5. NOTES
1. Additional code sections now require that the design documentation be prepared by a
qualified licensed professional engineer engaged primarily in the subject design (e.g.
Article 490, Equipment Over 1000 V, Nominal, Section 490.48).
2. In Sections 620.62, 700.28, 701.27, and 708.54 a new requirement was added for
selective coordination studies of overcurrent-protection devices to be prepared by a
licensed professional engineer or other qualified persons.
3. Article 590, Temporary Installations, Section 590.4(J) no longer allows cable assemblies
and flexible cords and cables used as branch circuits or feeders to be installed on the floor
or on the ground (this restriction does not apply to extension cables). Procedures
applicable to temporary installations will need to be reviewed to ensure compliance with
this requirement.
4. This document, along with NFPA 70-2011 evaluation, shall be considered when adopting
2014 edition of the National Electrical Code.
6. REFERENCES
1.
10 CFR 851, Worker Safety and Health Program
Page 4 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 – 2011, Requirements for Process Sealing Between Electrical
Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids
ANSI/ISA 60079-31– 2013, Explosive Atmospheres – Part 31: Equipment Dust Ignition
Protection by Enclosure “t”
ANSI/ISA 61241-1 – 2006, Electrical Apparatus for Use in Zone 21 and Zone 22
Hazardous (Classified) Locations − Protection by Enclosures “tD”
ANSI/UL 508 – 1999, UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment
ANSI/UL 2225 – 2013, UL Standard for Safety Cables and Cable-Fittings For Use In
Hazardous (Classified) Locations
ASTM E 11 – 2009, Standard Specification for Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing
Purposes
IEEE 80 – 2000, Guide for Safety In AC Substation Grounding.
NFPA 20 – 2013, Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
NFPA 33 – 2011, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Combustible
Materials
NFPA 34 – 2011, Standard for Dipping, Coating, and Printing Processes Using
Flammable or Combustible Liquids
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (2005, 2008, 2011, and 2014 editions)
NFPA 70E – 2004, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
NFPA 72 – 2013, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 79 – 2015, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
NFPA 90A – 2015, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems
NFPA 499 – 2013 Recommended Practice for the Classification of Combustible Dusts
and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process
Areas
7. ATTACHMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Email, Drutel to NFPA Licensing, dated March 13, 2014
Letter, Berry (NFPA) to Drutel, dated March 21, 2014
Evaluation Sample
Comparison Table
Page 5 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #1
Page 6 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #2
Page 7 of 203
Attachment to EFCOG Best Practice #178
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #3
Page 8 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Note: Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70®-2014 Redline, National Electrical Code®, Copyright © 2013, National Fire Protection
Association, Quincy, MA. The reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject, which is
represented only by the standard in its entirety.
CODE-WIDE CHANGES
Note: Changes listed under this heading are common to one or more articles and multiple sections of the NEC, and are addressed here in lieu of
specific articles/sections they appear in.
2014 NEC (with changes)
110.21 Marking.
(B) Field-Applied Hazard Markings. Where caution,
warning, or danger signs or labels are required by this
Code, the labels shall meet the following requirements:
(1) The marking shall adequately warn of the hazard using
effective words and/or colors and/or symbols.
(2) The label shall be permanently affixed to the equipment or
wiring method and shall not be hand written.
Exception to (2): Portions of labels or markings that are
variable, or that could be subject to changes, shall be permitted to be hand written and shall be legible.
(3) The label shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the
environment involved.
110.25 Lockable Disconnecting Means. Where a disconnecting means is required to be lockable open elsewhere in
this Code, it shall be capable of being locked in the open
position. The provisions for locking shall remain in place
with or without the lock installed.
Exception: Cord-and-plug connection locking provisions
shall not be required to remain in place without the lock
installed.
200.6
Means
Conductors.
of
Identifying
Grounded
(A) Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. An insulated grounded con-
Change Description and
Impact
Change Description:
Removed hazard marking requirements repeated throughout the
code and replaced with a reference to Section 110.21(B),
covering hazard marking requirements generically. Editorial
change, simplifying use of the NEC.
Rank
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Removed lockable disconnecting means requirements repeated
throughout the code and replaced with a reference to Section
110.25, covering these requirements generically. Editorial
change, simplifying use of the NEC.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change offers more choices to the installer and allows
identification of grounded conductor by system if multiple systems
Page 9 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ductor of 6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by one of
are installed.
the following means:
(3) Three continuous white or gray stripes along the con- Impact(s) :
ductor’s entire length on other than green insulation.
No negative impact.
Raised the 600V threshold in the NEC to 1000
V, based on the proposals submitted by the
High Voltage Task Group appointed by the
NEC Correlating Committee. Previously used
reference to the National Electrical Safety
Code (NESC) for voltages above 600V created
confusion for personnel responsible for design
of such systems.
Change Description:
The change is related to introduction of emerging technologies
(e.g., wind power generating systems, photovoltaic systems)
operating over 600V. To ensure safety the equipment must first
be tested and found acceptable for use at the higher voltage. In
addition, NEC must include prescriptive requirements to permit
installations at these higher operating voltages. This change was
made in majority cases where the previous code limited the
installation voltage to 600V. Also, as a consequence of this
change, the articles and sections referring to installations “over
600V” in the previous edition of the code were revised
accordingly to “over 1000V”.
2
Impact(s) :
This change is deemed to be acceptable and safe as long as the
above criteria are applied (i.e. equipment tested/approved and
NEC requirements exist for installation at up to 1000V).
Revised text of several sections to expand
applicability from “Buildings” to “Buildings and
Other Structures”.
Change Description:
This change clarifies the intent of the NEC addressing
applicability of the code to structures which cannot be classified
as “buildings”.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
The title of the definition of the term “metalenclosed switchgear” has been changed to
Change Description:
As revised, the definition now applies to all switchgear types,
Page 10 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
simply “switchgear,” resulting in more
expanded application of this term. The revised
definition also allows for inclusion of the term
“switchgear” in existing rules that only include
the term “switchboards,” but that requirement
covers both types of equipment. The last
sentence of the existing definition is more
informative than descriptive and, accordingly,
has been crafted into an informational note to
this definition. All switchgear covered by the
NEC rules are intended to be metal-enclosed
types. As revised, the definition now applies to
all switchgear types, such as metal-clad
switchgear, metal-enclosed switchgear and
low-voltage power circuit breaker switchgear
as indicated in the new informational note.
Action by Code-Making Panel 9 on Proposal 9104a results in a change in the title of Article
408 from “Switchboards and Panelboards” to
“Switchboards, Switchgear, and Panelboards,”
and the scope was revised to include
switchgear. Article 490 was also revised to
incorporate the term “switchgear” in place of
the term “metal-enclosed switchgear.” Other
NEC revisions have been made to replace the
term “metal-enclosed switchgear” with
“switchgear.”
such as metal-clad switchgear, metal-enclosed switchgear and
low-voltage power circuit breaker switchgear as indicated in the
new informational note. Action by Code-Making Panel 9 on
Proposal 9-104a results in a change in the title of Article 408 from
“Switchboards and Panelboards” to “Switchboards, Switchgear,
and Panelboards,” and the scope was revised to include
switchgear. Article 490 was also revised to incorporate the term
“switchgear” in place of the term “metal-enclosed switchgear.”
Other NEC revisions have been made to replace the term “metalenclosed switchgear” with “switchgear.”
Multiple definitions moved to Article 100
Change Description:
This change is consistent with the NEC Style Manual which
requires that definitions appearing in two or more articles be
located in Article 100.
Impact(s)
No negative impact.
Page 11 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2011 NEC added definitions for Overhead
Service Conductors and Underground Service
Conductors in Article 100, but these additional
terms were not added to Article 250 and other
applicable articles of the code discussing
services.
Change Description:
The terms Overhead Service Conductors and/or Underground
Service Conductors were added in Article 250 for clarity and to
reflect changes to service definitions and terminology made in the
2011 NEC.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
I. General
Accessible, Readily (Readily Accessible). Capable of being
reached quickly for operation, renewal, or inspections without
requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to actions
such as to use tools, to climb over or remove obstacles, or to
resort to portable ladders, and so forth.
ARTICLE 100
Definitions
Change Description:
This change is further clarifying the intent of the code regarding
accessibility by ensuring that for an equipment to be considered
readily accessible no actions such as use of tools shall be
necessary to access it.
2
Impact(s)
Improves safety - no negative impact.
ARTICLE 110
Requirements for Electrical Installations
110.16 Arc-Flash Hazard Warning. Electrical equipment,
Change Description:
such as switchboards, switchgear, panelboards, industrial
Included factory marking as an acceptable method for warning
control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control
about a potential arc-flash hazard. This change eliminates a need
centers, that are in other than dwelling units, and are likely
for adding a redundant arc-flash hazard warning label in the field
to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintefor equipment already marked by the manufacturer.
nance while energized, shall be field or factory marked to
warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall meet the requirements in 110.21(B)
and shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified
persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 12 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
maintenance of the equipment.
110.26 Spaces About Electrical Equipment.
(3) Personnel Doors. Where equipment rated 1200800 A
or more that contains overcurrent devices, switching devices, or control devices is installed and there is a personnel
door(s) intended for entrance to and egress from the
working space less than 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest
edge of the working space, the door(s) shall open in the
direction of egress and be equipped with listed panic
bars, pressure plates, or other devices that are normally
latched but open under simple pressure.hardware.
Change Description:
Lowered the ampacity of equipment from 1200A to 800A for
which the specific requirements for the personnel door apply.
This lowers the exposure of a worker in case of an arc flash in the
equipment.
Also, added requirements for dedicated equipment space in
outdoor applications, which was missing from the code. This
change allows enforcement of safe installation of equipment,
regardless of its location.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
(E) Dedicated Equipment Space.
(2) Outdoor.
(b) Dedicated Equipment Space. The space equal to
the width and depth of the equipment, and extending from
grade to a height of 1.8 m (6 ft) above the equipment, shall be
dedicated to the electrical installation. No piping or other
equipment foreign to the electrical installation shall be
located in this zone.
110.27 Guarding of Live Parts.
Change Description:
Increased elevation of live parts of equipment operating at
(A) Live Parts Guarded Against Accidental Contact.
voltages between 301 V and 600V. This coordinates the
(4) By elevation above the floor or other working surface as clearance requirements with the National Electrical Safety Code,
shown in 110.27(A)(4)(a) or (b) below:
124A3 and Table 124-1.
a. A minimum of 2.5 m (8 ft) or more above the floor or
other working surface.for 50 to 300 volts
b. A minimum of 2.6 m (81⁄2 ft) for 301 to 600 volts
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
ARTICLE 200
Use and Identification of Grounded Conductors
Page 13 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
200.4 Neutral Conductors. Neutral conductors shall be
installed in accordance with 200.4(A) and (B)
(A) Installation. Neutral conductors shall not be used for
more than one branch circuit, for more than one multiwire
branch circuit, or for more than one set of ungrounded feeder
conductors unless specifically permitted elsewhere in this
Code.
(B) Multiple Circuits. Where more than one neutral conductor associated with different circuits is in an enclosure,
grounded circuit conductors of each circuit shall be identified or grouped to correspond with the ungrounded circuit
conductor(s) by wire markers, cable ties, or similar means
in at least one location within the enclosure.
Change Description:
This new provision in the code requires identification and
grouping of the neutral conductor with ungrounded conductor of
each circuit in an enclosure, following similar requirement in
Section 210.4(D), but expanding it to all enclosures.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
Exception No. 1: The requirement for grouping or identifying shall not apply if the branch-circuit or feeder conductors enter from a cable or a raceway unique to the circuit
that makes the grouping obvious.
Exception No. 2: The requirement for grouping or identifying shall not apply where branch-circuit conductors pass
though a box or conduit body without a loop as described
in 314.16(B)(1) or without a splice or termination.
210.4 Multiwire Branch Circuits.
(A) General.
(D) Grouping. The ungrounded and grounded circuit conductors of each multiwire branch circuit shall be grouped
by cable ties or similar means in at least one location within
the panelboard or other point of origination.
Exception: The requirement for grouping shall not apply if
the circuit enters from a cable or raceway unique to the
circuit that makes the grouping obvious or if the conductors
ARTICLE 210
Branch Circuits
Change Description:
This change further clarifies the intent that the grounded and
ungrounded conductors shall be identifiable and allows an
exception to the grouping rule for conductors identified at the
terminations.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
are identified at their terminations with numbered wire
Page 14 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
markers corresponding to the appropriate circuit number .
210.5 Identification for Branch Circuits
(C) Identification of Ungrounded Conductors.
(2) Branch Circuits Supplied From Direct-Current Systems. Where a branch circuit is supplied from a dc system
operating at more than 50 volts, each ungrounded conductor of 4 AWG or larger shall be identified by polarity at all
termination, connection, and splice points by marking tape,
tagging, or other approved means; each ungrounded conductor of 6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by polarity
at all termination, connection, and splice points in compliance with 210.5(C)(2)(a) and (b). The identification methods utilized for conductors originating within each branchcircuit panelboard or similar branch-circuit distribution
equipment shall be documented in a manner that is readily
available or shall be permanently posted at each branchcircuit panelboard or similar branch-circuit distribution
equipment.
Change Description:
This change was triggered by the re-emergence of direct current
(DC) applications. This new section provides criteria for
identification of conductors in DC applications.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(a) Positive Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the
positive polarity of a dc system does not serve as the
connection point for the grounded conductor, each positive
ungrounded conductor shall be identified by one of the
following means:
(1) A continuous red outer finish
(2) A continuous red stripe durably marked along the conductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than
green, white, gray, or black
(3) Imprinted plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or
POS durably marked on insulation of a color other than green,
white, gray, or black, and repeated at intervals not exceeding
610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.120(B)
(b) Negative Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where the
negative polarity of a dc system does not serve as the
connection point for the grounded conductor, each negative
ungrounded conductor shall be identified by one of the
following means:
Page 15 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(1) A continuous black outer finish
(2) A continuous black stripe durably marked along the
conductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than
green, white, gray, or red
(3) Imprinted minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or
NEG durably marked on insulation of a color other
than green, white, gray, or red, and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with
310.120(B)
210.8 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
Personnel.
(B) Other Than Dwelling Units.
Change Description:
Clarifies the intent that ground-fault circuit-interrupter type
receptacles installed on rooftops need to be readily accessible
only from the roof top.
1
(3) Rooftops
Impact(s) :
Exception No. 1 to (3):Receptacles on rooftops shall not be No negative impact.
required to be readily accessible other than from the rooftop.
210.13 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. Each
branch-circuit disconnect rated 1000 A or more and installed on solidly grounded wye electrical systems of more
than 150 volts to ground, but not exceeding 600 volts
phase-to-phase, shall be provided with ground-fault protection of equipment in accordance with the provisions of
230.95.
Change Description:
This change expands the ground-fault protection (GFP) for
equipment for branch circuits meeting the criteria of Section
230.95. This change is similar to an earlier change which
introduced GFP for feeders (Section 215.10).
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
210.17 Electric Vehicle Branch Circuit. An outlet(s) installed for the purpose of charging electric vehicles shall be
supplied by a separate branch circuit. This circuit shall have
no other outlets.
Change Description:
New provision requiring vehicle charging station to be fed from a
dedicated circuit, with no other outlets on it.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 16 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
II. Branch-Circuit Ratings
210.19 Conductors — Minimum Ampacity and Size.
(A) Branch Circuits Not More Than 600 Volts.
(1) General. Branch-circuit conductors shall have an ampacity not less than the maximum load to be served. Conductors shall be sized to carry not less than the larger of
210.19(A)(1)(a) or (b).
(a) Where a branch circuit supplies continuous loads or
any combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the
minimum branch-circuit conductor size, before the application of any adjustment or correction factors,size shall
have an allowable ampacity not less than the noncontinuous
load plus 125 percent of the continuous load.
(b) The minimum branch-circuit conductor size shall have an
allowable ampacity not less than the maximum load to be
served after the application of any adjustment or correction
factors.
210.22 Permissible Loads, Individual Branch Circuits.
An individual branch circuit shall be permitted to supply
any load for which it is rated, but in no case shall the load
exceed the branch-circuit ampere rating.
Change Description:
The new wording clarifies that there are two conditions for
determining the minimum conductor size and that the conductor
is selected to carry not less than the larger of both conditions.
Impact(s) :
Improves clarity of the code – no negative impact.
1
Change Description:
Separated Section 210.23 into two sections by adding Section
210.22, covering individual branch circuits.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
210.64 Electrical Service Areas. At least one 125-volt,
single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere-rated receptacle outlet shall be
installed within 15 m (50 ft) of the electrical service
equipment.
Change Description:
New section added, requiring a receptacle (120V, 15A or 20A)
outlet within 50’ of the service area.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
ARTICLE 215
Feeders
Page 17 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
215.2 Minimum Rating and Size.
(A) Feeders Not More Than 600 Volts.
(1) General. Feeder conductors shall have an ampacity not
less than required to supply the load as calculated in Parts
III, IV, and V of Article 220. Conductors shall be sized to
carry not less than the larger of 215.2(A)(1)(a) or (b).
Change Description:
The new wording clarifies that there are two conditions for
determining the minimum conductor size and that the conductor
is selected to carry not less than the larger of both conditions.
Impact(s) :
Improves clarity of the code – no negative impact.
1
Change Description:
This change was triggered by the re-emergence of direct current
(DC) applications. This new section provides criteria for
identification of conductors in DC applications.
2
(a) Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or any
combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, The
minimum feeder circuit conductor size, before the application of any adjustment or correction factors, the minimum
feeder conductor size shall have an allowable ampacity not
less than the noncontinuous load plus 125 percent of the
continuous load.
(b) The minimum feeder conductor size shall have an
allowable ampacity not less than the maximum load to be
served after the application of any adjustment or correction
factors.
215.12 Identification for Feeders.
(C) Identification of Ungrounded Conductors. Ungrounded conductors shall be identified in accordance with
215.12(C)(1) or (C)(2), as applicable.
2) Feeders Supplied from Direct-Current Systems.
Where a feeder is supplied from a dc system operating at
more than 50 volts, each ungrounded conductor of 4 AWG
or larger shall be identified by polarity at all termination,
connection, and splice points by marking tape, tagging, or
other approved means; each ungrounded conductor of
6 AWG or smaller shall be identified by polarity at all
termination, connection, and splice points in compliance
with 215.12(C)(2)(a) and (b). The identification methods
utilized for conductors originating within each feeder panelboard or similar feeder distribution equipment shall be
documented in a manner that is readily available or shall be
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 18 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
permanently posted at each feeder panelboard or similar
feeder distribution equipment.
(a) Positive Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where
the positive polarity of a dc system does not serve as the
connection for the grounded conductor, each positive ungrounded conductor shall be identified by one of the following means:
(1) A continuous red outer finish
(2) A continuous red stripe durably marked along the conductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other than
green, white, gray, or black
(3) Imprinted plus signs (+) or the word POSITIVE or
POS durably marked on insulation of a color other than
green, white, gray, or black, and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.120(B)
(b) Negative Polarity, Sizes 6 AWG or Smaller. Where
the negative polarity of a dc system does not serve as the
connection for the grounded conductor, each negative ungrounded conductor shall be identified by one of the following means:
(1) A continuous black outer finish
(2) A continuous black stripe durably marked along the
conductor’s entire length on insulation of a color other
than green, white, gray, or red
(3) Imprinted minus signs (–) or the word NEGATIVE or
NEG durably marked on insulation of a color other than
green, white, gray, or red, and repeated at intervals not
exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) in accordance with 310.120(B)
ARTICLE 220
Branch-Circuit, Feeder, and Service Calculations
220.12 Lighting Load for Specified Occupancies. A unit
Change Description:
load of not less than that specified in Table 220.12 for
The new exception to calculating lighting loads was added to
occupancies specified therein shall constitute the minimum
allow lighting loads to be calculated in accordance with local
lighting load. The floor area for each floor shall be calcucodes where power monitoring systems are in place.
lated from the outside dimensions of the building, dwelling
unit, or other area involved. For dwelling units, the calcu-
Page 19 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
lated floor area shall not include open porches, garages, or
unused or unfinished spaces not adaptable for future use.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: Where the building is designed and constructed
to comply with an energy code adopted by the local
authority, the lighting load shall be permitted to be
calculated at the values specified in the energy code where
the following conditions are met:
(1) A power monitoring system is installed that will provide continuous information regarding the total general
lighting load of the building.
(2) The power monitoring system will be set with alarm
values to alert the building owner or manager if the
lighting load exceeds the values set by the energy code.
(3) The demand factors specified in 220.42 are not applied
to the general lighting load.
ARTICLE 225
Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders
225.4 Conductor Covering. Where within 3.0 m (10 ft) of
Change Description:
any building or structure other than supporting poles or towers,
This change prohibits the use of bare conductors within 10’ from
open individual (aerial) overhead conductors shall be insulated
any building or structure, except poles or towers.
or covered. for the nominal voltage.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
225.11 Circuit Exits and Entrances. Where outside
branch and feeder circuits leave or enter a building, the
requirements of 230.52 and 230.54 shall apply.
225.11 Feeder and Branch-Circuit Conductors Entering, Exiting, or Attached to Buildings or Structures.
Feeder and branch-circuit conductors entering or exiting
buildings or structures shall be in installed in accordance
with the requirements of 230.52. Overhead branch circuits
and feeders attached to buildings or structures shall be in-
Change Description:
Change the title and the text of this section to improve the clarity.
Also, expanded this requirement to include other structures.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 20 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
stalled in accordance with the requirements of 230.54.
225.17 Masts as Supports. Where a mast is Only feeder or
branch-circuit conductors specified within this section shall
be permitted to be attached to the feeder and/or branchcircuit mast. Masts used for the support of final spans of
feeders or branch circuits, circuits shall be in- stalled in
accordance with 225.17(A) and (B).
Change Description:
Text revised for clarity. Also, included a requirement for all
components of a mast to be identified for use with a mast. In
addition, put some restrictions on attaching conductors to a mast
to ensure its structural integrity.
2
A) Strength. itThe mast shall be of adequate strength or be Impact(s) :
supported by braces or guys to withstand safely the strain
Improves safety – no negative impact.
imposed by the overhead drop. Where raceway-type masts
are used, all raceway fittings shall be identified for use with
masts. Only the feeder or branch-circuit conduc- tors. Hubs
intended for use with a conduit that serves as a mast for
support of feeder or branch-circuit conductors specified within
this section shall be permitted to be attached to the feeder
and/or branch-circuit identified for use with a mast.
(B) Attachment. Feeder and/or branch-circuit conductors
shall not be attached to a mast between a weatherhead or the
end of the conduit and a coupling where the coupling is
located above the last point of securement to the building or
other structure or is located above the building or other
structure.
225.27 Raceway Seal. Where a raceway enters a building
or structure from an underground distribution system, it
shall be sealed in accordance with 300.5(G). Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, conductor insulation, bare conductor, shield, or other components.
Change Description:
Expanded the scope of this section to require compatibility of
sealants with conductor insulation and with bare conductor
material.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
225.36 Suitable for Service Equipment. Type. The disconnecting means specified in 225.31 shall be comprised of a
Change Description:
Revised to specifically identify acceptable disconnecting means
Page 21 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
circuit breaker, molded case switch, general-use switch, snap
switch, or other approved means. Where applied in
accordance with 250.32(B), Exception No. 1, the
disconnecting means shall be suitable for use as service
equipment.
and to clarify when a disconnecting means must be suitable for
use as a service equipment. Also, eliminated exception allowing
3- and 4-way switches as disconnecting means because they
would not provide a positive indication that a circuit was
disconnected.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
II. Over 6001000 Volts.
225.52 Disconnecting Means.
(A) Location. A building or structure disconnecting means
shall be located in accordance with 225.32, or, if not readily
accessible, it shall be operable by mechanical linkage from a
readily accessible point. For multibuilding industrial installations under single management, it shall be permitted to be
electrically operated by a similarly locatedreadily accessible,
remote-control device in a separate building or structure.
Change Description:
This change allows operation of disconnecting means over
1000V using remote-control device from a readily accessible
location.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Type. Each building or structure disconnect shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors
it controls and shall have a fault-closing rating not less than
the maximum available short-circuit current available at its
supply terminals.
Exception: Where the individual disconnecting means consists of fused cutouts, the simultaneous disconnection of all
ungrounded supply conductors shall not be required if there is
a means to disconnect the load before opening the cutouts. A
permanent legible sign shall be installed adjacent to the fused
cutouts indicating the above requirement. and shall read DISCONNECT LOAD BEFORE OPENING CUTOUTS.
225.56 Inspections and Tests.
(A) Pre-Energization and Operating Tests. The complete electrical system design, including settings for protec-
Change Description:
Defined in more detail the required pre-energization and
Page 22 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
tive, switching, and control circuits, shall be prepared in
advance and made available on request to the authority
having jurisdiction and shall be performance tested when
first installed on-site. Each protective, switching, and control circuit shall be adjusted in accordance with the recommendations of the protective device studysystem design
and tested by actual operation using current injection or
equivalent methods as necessary to ensure that each and
every such circuit operates correctly to the satisfaction of
the authority having jurisdiction.
(B) Type. Each building or structure disconnect shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded supply conductors
it controls and shall have a fault-closing rating not less than
the maximum available short-circuit current available at its
supply terminals.
operating tests for systems over 1000 V.
Also, clarified what wording is to be provided for the warning sign
to be located adjacent to a fuse cutout.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: Where the individual disconnecting means consists of fused cutouts, the simultaneous disconnection of all
ungrounded supply conductors shall not be required if there is a
means to disconnect the load before opening the cutouts. A
permanent legible sign shall be installed adjacent to the fused
cutouts indicating the above requirement. and shall read DISCONNECT LOAD BEFORE OPENING CUTOUTS.
225.70 Substations.
Change Description:
Relocated requirements to Article 490, covering equipment over
1000 V.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 230
Services
Page 23 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
230.6 Conductors Considered Outside the Building.
Conductors shall be considered outside of a building or
other structure under any of the following conditions:
(5) Where installed in overhead service masts on the outside surface of the building traveling through the cave of
that building within rigid metal conduit (Type RMC) or
intermediate metal conduit (Type IMC) to meet the
requirements of 230.24. used to accommodate the clearance
requirements in 230.24 and routed directly through an eave
but not a wall of a building.
230.28 Service Masts as Supports. Where a service mast
is used for the support of service-drop conductors, it shall
be of adequate strength or be supported by braces or guys
to withstand safely the strain imposed by the service drop.
Where raceway-type service masts are used, all raceway
fittings shall be identified for use with service masts. Only
power service-drop conductors shall be permitted to be attached to a service mast. Only power service-drop or overhead service conductors shall be permitted to be attached to
a service mast. Service masts used for the support of
service-drop or overhead service conductors shall be installed in accordance with 230.28(A) and (B).
Change Description:
The change defines as outside the building RMC or IMC
raceways passing through an eave but not a wall of a building.
This limits this provision of the code to heavy wall steel raceways.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
Change Description:
Text revised for clarity. Also, included a requirement for all
components of a mast to be identified for use with service
equipment. In addition, put some restrictions on attaching
conductors to a mast to ensure its structural integrity.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
(A) Strength. The service mast shall be of adequate
strength or be supported by braces or guys to withstand
safely the strain imposed by the service-drop or overhead
service conductors. Hubs intended for use with a conduit
that serves as a service mast shall be identified for use with
service-entrance equipment.
(B) Attachment. Service-drop or overhead service conductors shall not be attached to a service mast between a
weatherhead or the end of the conduit and a coupling,
where the coupling is located above the last point of securement to the building or other structure or is located above
the building or other structure.
Page 24 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
230.42 Minimum Size and Rating.
A) General. The ampacity of the service-entrance conductors before the application of any adjustment or correction factors shall not be less than either 230.42(A)(1),
(A)(2), or (A)(23). Loads shall be determined in accordance
with Part III, IV, or V of Article 220 as applicable. Ampacity
shall be determined from 310.15. The maximum allow- able
current of busways shall be that value for which the busway
has been listed or labeled.
(1) The sum of the noncontinuous loads plus 125 percent of
continuous loads
Change Description:
Companion to changes to Sections 210.19(A)(1) and 215.2(A)(1).
The new wording clarifies that there are two conditions for
determining the minimum conductor size and that the conductor
is selected to carry not less than the larger of both conditions.
Impact(s) :
Improves clarity – no negative impact.
1
Change Description:
This change provides label spacing requirements, consistent with
Section 392.18(H) for cable trays containing high voltage
conductors.
2
Exception: Grounded conductors that are not connected to an
overcurrent device shall be permitted to be sized at
100 percent of the continuous and noncontinuous load.
(2) The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the continuous
load after the application of any adjustment or correction
factors.
(2)(3)The sum of the noncontinuous load plus the continuous load if the service-entrance conductors terminate in an
overcurrent device where both the overcurrent device and
its assembly are listed for operation at 100 percent of their
rating.
230.44 Cable Trays. Cable tray systems shall be
permitted to support service-entrance conductors.
Cable trays used to support service-entrance
conductors shall contain only service-entrance
conductors and shall be limited to the following methods:
(1) Type SE cable
(2) Type MC cable
(3) Type MI cable
(4) Type IGS cable
Impact(s) :
Provides consistency – no negative impact.
(5) Single thermoplastic-insulated conductors 1/0 and
larger with CT rating.
Page 25 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Such cable trays shall be identified with permanently
affixed labels with the wording “Service-Entrance Conductors.” The labels shall be located so as to be visible after
installation and placedwith a spacing not to exceed 3 m
(10 ft) so that the service-entrance conductors are able to be
readily traced through the entire length of the cable tray.
230.82 Equipment Connected to the Supply Side of Service Disconnect.
(3) Meter disconnect switches nominally rated not in excess of 600 volts1000 V that have a short-circuit current
rating equal to or greater than the available short- circuit
current, provided that all metal housings and service
enclosures are grounded in accordance with Part VII and
bonded in accordance with Part V of Ar- ticle 250. A meter
disconnect switch shall be capable of interrupting the load
served. A meter disconnect shall be legibly field marked
on its exterior in a manner suitable for the environment as
follows:
METER DISCONNECT NOT SERVICE EQUIPMENT
Change Description:
Added a labeling requirement for meter disconnect to ensure a
clear understanding that this particular disconnect is not a service
disconnect.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
ARTICLE 240
Overcurrent Protection
240.21 Location in Circuit.
Change Description:
(B) Feeder Taps.
This new exception allows use of manufacturer specified wire
(1) Taps Not over 3 m (10 ft) Long. If the length of the tap size in lieu of applying a tap rule for conductors supplying listed
conductors does not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and the tap conductors equipment, such as surge protective device.
comply with all of the following:
(1) The ampacity of the tap conductors is
a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on
the circuits supplied by the tap conductors, and
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
b. Not less than the rating of the equipment
containing an overcurrent device(s) supplied by
the tap conductors or not less than the rating of
the overcurrent protective device at the
termination of the tap conductors.
Page 26 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Exception to b: Where listed equipment, such as a surge
protective device(s) [SPD(s)], is provided with specific instructions on minimum conductor sizing, the ampacity of
the tap conductors supplying that equipment shall be permitted to be determined based on the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(C) Transformer Secondary Conductors.
(10 ft) Long. If the length of secondary conductor does
not exceed 3 m (10 ft) and complies with all of the
following:
(1) The ampacity of the secondary
conductors is
a. Not less than the combined calculated loads on
the circuits supplied by the secondary
conductors, and
b. Not less than the rating of the equipment
containing an overcurrent device(s) supplied by
the secondary conductors or not less than the
rating of the overcurrent protective device at
the termination of the secondary conductors.
Exception: Where listed equipment, such as a surge protective device(s) [SPD(s)], is provided with specific instructions on minimum conductor sizing, the ampacity of the tap
conductors supplying that equipment shall be permitted to
be determined based on the manufacturer’s instructions.
240.87 Noninstantaneous Trip.Arc Energy Reduction.
Where the highest continuous current trip setting for which
the actual overcurrent device installed in a circuit breaker is
used without an instantaneous trip,rated or can be adjusted is
1200 A or higher, 240.87(A) and (B) shall apply.
Change Description:
This change provides more clarity and usability to this
requirement and adds energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation
system as one of the methods of reducing arc flash energy.
(B) Method to Reduce Clearing Time. Where a circuit
breaker is utilized without an instantaneous trip, oneOne of
the following or approved equivalent means shall be provided:
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 27 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(4) Energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system
(5) An approved equivalent means
250.10 Protection of Ground Clamps and Fittings.
Ground clamps or other fittings shall be approved for general use without protection or shall be protected from exposed to physical damage as indicated in (1) or (2) as follows:
(1) In installations where they are not likely to be damaged
(2) Where shall be enclosed in metal, wood, or equivalent
protective coveringcovering.
ARTICLE 250
Grounding and Bonding
Change Description:
Change to the wording provides more clarity.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
250.21 Alternating-Current Systems of 50 Volts to Less
Than 1000 Volts Not Required to Be Grounded.
C) Marking. Ungrounded systems shall be legibly
marked “Caution: Ungrounded System Operating —
Volts Between Conductors” at the source or first disconnecting means of the system. The marking shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for labeling of ungrounded systems to
include operating voltage between conductors, consistent with
requirement in 408.3(F)(2).
250.24 Grounding Service-Supplied AlternatingCurrent Systems.
Change Description:
A new Table 250.102(C)(1) was added for sizing grounded
conductors and bonding jumpers rather than Table 250.66.
References to this new table and the existing Table 250.66 were
revised throughout Article 250.
(C) Grounded Conductor Brought to Service Equipment.
(1) Sizing for a Single Raceway. The grounded conductor
shall not be smaller than the required grounding electrode
conductor specified in Table 250.66250.102(C)(1). but shall
not be required to be larger than the largest ungrounded
service-entrance conductor(s). In addition, for sets of ungrounded service-entrance conductors larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the grounded conductor shall not be smaller than 121⁄2 percent of the circular mil
area of the largest set of service-entrance ungrounded con-
1
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 28 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ductor(s).
250.28 Main Bonding Jumper and System Bonding
Jumper.
(D) Size.
1) General. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding
jumpers shall not be smaller than the sizes shown in Table
250.66. Where the supply conductors are larger than 1100
kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the bonding jumper
shall have an area that is not less than 121⁄2 percent of the
area of the largest phase conductor except that, where the
phase conductors and the bonding jumper are of different
materials (copper or aluminum), the minimum size of the
bonding jumper shall be based on the assumed use of phase
conductors of the same material as the bonding jumper and
with an ampacity equivalent to that of the installed phase
conductors. Main bonding jumpers and system bonding
jumpers shall not be smaller than specified in Table
250.102(C)(1).
250.30 Grounding Separately Derived AlternatingCurrent Systems. In addition to complying with
250.30(A) for grounded systems, or as provided in
250.30(B) for ungrounded systems, separately derived systems shall comply with 250.20, 250.21, 250.22, and
250.26.250.22, or 250.26, as applicable. Multiple separately derived systems that are connected in parallel shall
be installed in accordance with 250.30.
250.30 Grounding Separately Derived AlternatingCurrent Systems.
(A) Grounded Systems.
(1) System Bonding Jumper.
Exception No. 2: A If a building or structure is supplied by
a feeder from an outdoor transformer, a system bonding
Change Description:
A new Table 250.102(C)(1) was added for sizing grounded
conductors and bonding jumpers rather than Table 250.66.
References to this new table and the existing Table 250.66 were
revised throughout Article 250.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The added text provides requirements for multiple separately
derived systems operating in parallel.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The revised text provides for the limited case where the grounded
conductor can be bonded at the source of a separately derived
system and in a building or structure served and continues to
prohibit parallel paths. This limits the application of this exception
to buildings and structures supplied by a feeder from an outdoor
transformer.
Page 29 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
jumper at both the source and the first disconnecting means
shall be permitted if doing so does not establish a parallel
path for the grounded conductor. If a grounded conductor
is used in this manner, it shall not be smaller than the size
specified for the system bonding jumper but shall not be
required to be larger than the ungrounded conductor(s).
For the purposes of this exception, connection through
the earth shall not be considered as providing a parallel
path.
250.30 Grounding Separately Derived AlternatingCurrent Systems.
(A) Grounded Systems.
(2) Supply-Side Bonding Jumper.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
A companion change to Section 250.30(A)(1), Exception No.2,
allowing grounded conductor as a means of bonding enclosures.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: A supply-side bonding jumper shall not be required between enclosures for installations made in compliance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 2.
250.30 Grounding Separately Derived AlternatingCurrent Systems.
(A) Grounded Systems.
(3) Grounded Conductor.
a) Sizing for a Single Raceway. The grounded conductor shall not be smaller than the required grounding electrode
conductor specified in Table 250.66250.102(C)(1). but shall
not be required to be larger than the largest derived ungrounded conductor(s). In addition, for sets of derived ungrounded conductors larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750
kcmil aluminum, the grounded conductor shall not be smaller
than 121⁄2 percent of the circular mil area of the largest set of
derived ungrounded conductors.
250.32 Buildings or Structures Supplied by a Feeder(s)
or Branch Circuit(s).
Change Description:
A new Table 250.102(C)(1) was added for sizing grounded
conductors and bonding jumpers rather than Table 250.66.
References to this new table and the existing Table 250.66 were
revised throughout Article 250.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Page 30 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(B) Grounded Systems.
(1) Supplied by a Feeder or Branch Circuit.
Exception No. 2: If system bonding jumpers are installed
in accordance with 250.30(A)(1), Exception No. 2, the
feeder grounded circuit conductor at the building or
structure served shall be connected to the equipment
grounding conductors, grounding electrode conductor, and
the enclsure for the first disconnecting means.
250.36 High-Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems.
(F) Grounding Electrode Conductor Connection Location. The For services or separately derived systems, the
grounding electrode conductor shall be connected at any point
from the grounded side of the grounding impedance to the
equipment grounding connection at the service equipment or
the first system disconnecting means of a separately derived
system.
The added exception provides requirements for the grounded
conductor in a building or structure served by a feeder from an
outdoor transformer separately derived system installed in
accordance with 250.30(A)(1) Exception No. 2.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The change clarifies the intent of this section which requires
establishing of the fault-current path from the system back to the
source of the separately derived system.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
250.62 Grounding Electrode Conductor Material. The
grounding electrode conductor shall be of copper, aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, or copper-clad aluminum. the
items as permitted in 250.68(C). The material selected shall
be resistant to any corrosive condition existing at the installation or shall be protected against corrosion. The conductorConductors of the wire type shall be solid or stranded,
insulated, covered, or bare.
Change Description:
Clarified the intent that materials identified in Section 250.68(C)
are acceptable as grounding electrode conductors (e.g. water
piping, metal structural frame).
250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation.
Change Description:
The added sentence clarifies that grounding electrode conductors
or grounding electrode bonding jumpers are not subject to the
burial depth requirements found in Section 300.5.
(B) Securing and Protection Against Physical Damage.
Grounding electrode conductors and grounding electrode
bonding jumpers shall not be required to comply with 300.5.
1
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 31 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation.
(D) Service Building or Structure with Multiple Disconnecting Means in Separate Enclosures. IfFor a service
consists of more than a single enclosure as permitted in
230.71(A),or feeder with two or more disconnecting means
in separate enclosures supplying a building or structure, the
grounding electrode connections shall be made in accordance with 250.64(D)(1), (D)(2), or (D)(3).
Change Description:
This revised language incorporates clarification to ensure that this
section can be applied to both, building services and buildings fed
by one or more feeders.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Individual Grounding Electrode Conductors. A
grounding electrode conductor shall be connected between
the grounded conductor in each service equipment disconnecting means enclosure and the grounding electrode system.grounding electrode system and one or more of the
following, as applicable:
(1) Grounded conductor in each service equipment disconnecting means enclosure
(2) Equipment grounding conductor installed with the
feeder
(3) Supply-side bonding jumper
Each grounding electrode conductor shall be sized in
accordance with 250.66 based on the service-entrance or
feeder conductor(s) supplying the individual service disconnecting means.
(3) Common Location. A grounding electrode conductor
shall be connected to the grounded service conductor(s) in
a wireway or other accessible enclosure on the supply side
of the service disconnecting means.means to one or more of
the following, as applicable:
(1) Grounded service conductor(s)
(2) Equipment grounding conductor installed with the
feeder
(3) Supply-side bonding jumper
Page 32 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
250.64 Grounding Electrode Conductor Installation.
(E) Raceways and Enclosures for Grounding Electrode
Conductors.
(1) General. Ferrous metal raceways and enclosures for
grounding electrode conductors shall be electrically continuous from the point of attachment to cabinets or equipment to the grounding electrode and shall be securely fastened to the ground clamp or fitting. NonferrousFerrous
metal raceways and enclosures shall not be required to be
electrically continuous. Ferrous metal enclosures that are
not physically continuous from cabinets or equipmentbonded at each end of the raceway or enclosure to the
grounding electrode shall be made electrically continuous
by bonding each end of the raceway or enclosure to the
grounding electrode conductor. or grounding electrode conductor. Nonferrous metal raceways and enclosures shall not
be required to be electrically continuous.
Change Description:
This change affirms that nonferrous metal enclosures are not
required to be electrically continuous or bonded.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Methods. Bonding methods shall be in compliance
with 250.92(B) for installations at service equipment locations and with and ensured by one of the methods in
250.92(B)(2) through (B)(4) for other than service equipment locations shall apply at each end and to all intervening
ferrous raceways, boxes, and enclosures between the cabinets or equipment and the grounding electrode.(B)(4).
250.66 Size of Alternating-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor.
A) Connections to a Rod, Pipe, or Plate Electrode(s).
Where the grounding electrode conductor is connected to a
single or multiple rod, pipe, or plate electrode(s), or any
combination thereof, as permitted in 250.52(A)(5) or
(A)(7), that portion of the conductor that is the sole connection to the grounding electrode(s) shall not be required to
be larger than 6 AWG copper wire or 4 AWG aluminum wire.
Change Description:
Clarification added for the “sole connection” provisions.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
B) Connections to Concrete-Encased Electrodes. Where the
Page 33 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
grounding electrode conductor is connected to a single or
multiple concrete-encased electrode(s) as permitted in
250.52(A)(3), that portion of the conductor that is the sole
connection to the grounding electrode(s) shall not be required to be larger than 4 AWG copper wire.
250.68 Grounding Electrode Conductor and Bonding
Jumper Connection to Grounding Electrodes.
(C) Metallic Water Pipe and Structural Metal.Grounding Electrode Connections. Grounding electrode conductors and bonding jumpers shall be permitted to be
connected at the following locations and used to extend
the connection to an electrode(s):
(2) The metal structural frame of a building that is directly
connected to a grounding electrode as specified in
250.52(A)(2) or 250.68(C)(2)(a), (b), or (c) shall be
permitted to be used as a bonding conductor to interconnect electrodes that are part of the grounding electrode
system, or as a grounding electrode conductor.
Change Description:
Removed prescriptive language limiting the use of metal
structural frame as a bonding conductor. Also, recognized a
common practice of extending rebar outside the concrete as an
allowable grounding electrode conductor connection point.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
a. By connecting the structural metal frame to the reinforcing bars of a concrete-encased electrode, as
provided in 250.52(A)(3), or ground ring as provided in 250.52(A)(4)
b. By bonding the structural metal frame to one or
more of the grounding electrodes, as specified in
250.52(A)(5) or (A)(7), that comply with
250.53(A)(2)
c. By other approved means of establishing a connection to earth
(3) A concrete-encased electrode of either the conductor
type, reinforcing rod or bar installed in accordance with
250.52(A)(3) extended from its location within the concrete to an accessible location above the concrete shall
be permitted.
250.102 Bonding Conductors and Jumpers.
Change Description:
Page 34 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(C) Size — Supply-Side Bonding Jumper.
(1) Size for Supply Conductors in a Single Raceway or
Cable. The supply-side bonding jumper shall not be
smaller than the sizes shown specified in Table
250.66250.102(C)(1). for grounding electrode conductors.
Where the ungrounded supply conductors are larger than
1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the supplyside bonding jumper shall have an area not less than 121⁄2
percent of the area of the largest set of ungrounded supply
conductors.
(2) Size for Parallel Conductor Installations in Two or
More Raceways. Where the ungrounded supply conductors are paralleled in two or more raceways or cables, and
an individual supply-side bonding jumper is used for bonding these raceways or cables, the size of the supply-side
bonding jumper for each raceway or cable shall be selected
from Table 250.66250.102(C)(1) based on the size of the
ungrounded supply conductors in each raceway or cable. A
single supply-side bonding jumper installed for bonding
two or more raceways or cables shall be sized in accordance with 250.102(C)(1).
(3) Different Materials. Where the ungrounded supply
conductors and the supply-side bonding jumper are of different materials (copper or aluminum), the minimum size
of the supply-side bonding jumper shall be based on the
assumed use of ungrounded conductors of the same material as the supply-side bonding jumper and with an ampacity equivalent to that of the installed ungrounded supply
conductors.
Table 250.102(C) Grounded Conductor, Main Bonding
Jumper, System Bonding Jumper, and Supply-Side
Bonding Jumper for Alternating-Current Systems
The full Table not included for brevity.
A new Table 250.102(C)(1) was added for sizing grounded
conductors and bonding jumpers rather than Table 250.66.
References to this new table and the existing Table 250.66 were
revised throughout Article 250.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This new table and corresponding changes to related sections
are provided to simplify the sizing requirements for fault carrying
conductors that are not sized using Table 250.122. Presently,
multiple sections such as for main bonding jumpers, system
Page 35 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
bonding jumpers, supply side bonding jumpers and grounded
conductors refer to Table 250.66 for sizing the conductor or
jumper.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
250.104 Bonding of Piping Systems and Exposed Structural Steel.Metal.
(B) Other Metal Piping.
The bonding conductor(s) or jumper(s) shall be sized in
accordance with 250.122, using the rating of the circuit that is
likely to energize the piping system(s). The equipment
grounding conductor for the circuit that is likely to energize
the piping shall be permitted to serve as the bonding means.
The points of attachment of the bonding jumper(s) shall be
accessible.
Change Description:
Editorial change clarifying the intent.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
250.119 Identification of Equipment Grounding Conductors.
Change Description:
Editorial change clarifying the intent.
Exception No. 2: Flexible cords having an integral insulation and jacket without an equipment grounding conductor
shall be permitted to have a continuous outer finish that is
green.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception No. 3: Conductors with green insulation shall be
permitted to be used as ungrounded signal conductors
where installed between the output terminations of traffıc
signal control and traffıc signal indicating heads. Signaling
circuits installed in accordance with this exception shall
include an equipment grounding conductor in accordance
with 250.118. Wire-type equipment grounding conductors
shall be bare or have insulation or covering that is green
with one or more yellow stripes.
Page 36 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
250.121 Use of Equipment Grounding Conductors. An
equipment grounding conductor shall not be used as a
grounding electrode conductor.
Exception: A wire-type equipment grounding conductor installed in compliance with 250.6(A) and the applicable requirements for both the equipment grounding conductor
and the grounding electrode conductor in Parts II, III, and
VI of this article shall be permitted to serve as both an
equipment grounding conductor and a grounding electrode
conductor.
Change Description:
The code making panel recognized that restricting the use of a
wire-type equipment grounding conductor for both the equipment
grounding conductor and grounding electrode conductor was not
justified when it was introduced in 2011 edition of NEC. However,
this restriction remains in effect for all types of equipment
grounding conductors identified in Section 250.118 other than
wire-type conductor.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
250.130 Equipment Grounding Conductor Connections.
(C) Nongrounding Receptacle Replacement or Branch
Circuit Extensions.
Change Description:
This addition improves the grounding of nongrounding receptacle
replacement or circuit extensions by allowing the most direct path
back to the enclosure where the branch circuit originates.
(4) An equipment grounding conductor that is part of another branch circuit that originates from the enclosure
where the branch circuit for the receptacle or branch circuit
originates
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
VIII. Direct-Current Systems
Change Description:
This change is related to the re-emergence of direct current
applications with 50 V storage batteries and takes into account
differences in the battery chemistries, with voltages potentially
slightly exceeding 50 V threshold. It also aligns this voltage level
with Chapter 9, Table 11(B) 60 V break point.
250.162 Direct-Current Circuits and Systems to Be
Grounded.
(A) Two-Wire, Direct-Current Systems. A 2-wire, dc
system supplying premises wiring and operating at greater
than 5060 volts but not greater than 300 volts shall be
grounded.
Exception No. 1: A system equipped with a ground detector and supplying only industrial equipment in limited areas shall not be required to be grounded where installed
adjacent to or integral with the source of supply.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 37 of 203
2
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
250.166 Size of the Direct-Current Grounding Electrode Conductor. The size of the grounding electrode conductor for a dc system shall be as specified in 250.166(A)
and (B), except as permitted by through 250.166(C)
through (E). The grounding electrode conductor for a dc
system shall meet the sizing requirements in this section
but shall not be required to be larger than 3/0 copper or 250
kcmil aluminum.
Change Description:
This change fills the gap regarding the required maximum size of
a grounding electrode conductor in a DC system. It brings this
section into alignment with the similar requirements which exist
for AC systems.
250.167 Direct-Current Ground-Fault Detection.
Change Description:
This new section provides details for ground-fault detection and
aligns the requirements with the requirements found in NFPA
70E.
(A) Ungrounded Systems. Ground-fault detection systems shall be required for ungrounded systems.
(B) Grounded Systems. Ground-fault detection shall be
permitted for grounded systems.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(C) Marking. Direct-current systems shall be legibly
marked to indicate the grounding type at the dc source or
the first disconnecting means of the system. The marking
shall be of sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved.
250.186 Ground-Fault Circuit Conductor Brought to
Service Equipment.
(A) Systems with a Grounded Conductor at the Service
Point. Where an ac system operating at over 1000 volts is
grounded at any point and is provided with a grounded
conductor at the service point, a grounded conductor(s)
shall be installed and routed with the ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting means and shall be connected to each disconnecting means grounded conductor(s)
terminal or bus. A main bonding jumper shall connect the
grounded conductor(s) to each service disconnecting means
enclosure. The grounded conductor(s) shall be installed in
accordance with 250.186(A)(1) through (A)(4). The size of
Change Description:
This new section provides requirements for a conductor providing
a low impedance path for ground fault currents to return to the
source on systems over 1000 V. It aligns the requirements for
over 1000 V with requirements found in Section 250.24(C) for
1000 V and below systems regarding ground fault return path.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 38 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
the solidly grounded circuit conductor(s) shall be the larger
of that determined by 250.184 or 250.186(A)(1) or (A)(2).
Exception: Where two or more service disconnecting
means are located in a single assembly listed for use as
service equipment, it shall be permitted to connect the
grounded conductor(s) to the assembly common grounded
conductor(s) terminal or bus. The assembly shall include a
main bonding jumper for connecting the grounded conductor(s) to the assembly enclosure.
(1) Sizing for a Single Raceway or Overhead Conductor. The grounded conductor shall not be smaller than the
required grounding electrode conductor specified in Table
250.66 but shall not be required to be larger than the largest
ungrounded service-entrance conductor(s). In addition, for
sets of ungrounded service-entrance conductors larger than
1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the grounded
conductor shall not be smaller than 121⁄2 percent of the
circular mil area of the largest set of service-entrance ungrounded conductor(s).
(2) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways or
Overhead Conductors. If the ungrounded service-entrance
conductors are installed in parallel in two or more raceways
or as overhead parallel conductors, the grounded conductors shall also be installed in parallel. The size of the
grounded conductor in each raceway or overhead shall be
based on the total circular mil area of the parallel ungrounded conductors in the raceway or overhead, as indicated in 250.186(A)(1), but not smaller than 1/0 AWG.
Informational Note: See 310.10(H) for
grounded conduc- tors connected in parallel.
(3) Delta-Connected Service. The grounded conductor of
a 3-phase, 3-wire delta service shall have an ampacity not
less than that of the ungrounded conductors.
(4) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance
grounded neutral systems shall be installed in accordance
with 250.187.
Page 39 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(B) Systems Without a Grounded Conductor at the Service Point. Where an ac system operating at greater than
1000 volts is grounded at any point and is not provided
with a grounded conductor at the service point, a supplyside bonding jumper shall be installed and routed with the
ungrounded conductors to each service disconnecting
means and shall be connected to each disconnecting means
equipment grounding conductor terminal or bus. The
supply-side bonding jumper shall be installed in accordance
with 250.186(B)(1) through (B)(3).
Exception: Where two or more service disconnecting
means are located in a single assembly listed for use as
service equipment, it shall be permitted to connect the
supply-side bonding jumper to the assembly common
equipment grounding terminal or bus.
(1) Sizing for a Single Raceway or Overhead Conductor. The supply-side bonding jumper shall not be smaller
than the required grounding electrode conductor specified
in Table 250.66 but shall not be required to be larger than
the largest ungrounded service-entrance conductor(s). In
addition, for sets of ungrounded service-entrance conductors larger than 1100 kcmil copper or 1750 kcmil aluminum, the supply-side bonding jumper shall not be smaller
than 121⁄2 percent of the circular mil area of the largest set
of service-entrance ungrounded conductor(s).
(2) Parallel Conductors in Two or More Raceways or
Overhead Conductors. If the ungrounded service-entrance
conductors are installed in parallel in two or more raceways
or overhead conductors, the supply-side bonding jumper
shall also be installed in parallel. The size of the supplyside bonding jumper in each raceway or overhead shall be
based on the total circular mil area of the parallel ungrounded conductors in the raceway or overhead, as indicated in 250.186(A)(1), but not smaller than 1/0 AWG.
(3) Impedance Grounded Neutral Systems. Impedance
Page 40 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
grounded neutral systems shall be installed in accordance
with 250.187.
250.194 Grounding and Bonding of Fences and Other
Metal Structures. Metallic fences enclosing, and other metal
structures in or surrounding, a substation with exposed electrical conductors and equipment shall be grounded and bonded
to limit step, touch, and transfer voltages.
(A) Metal Fences. Where metal fences are located within
5 m (16 ft) of the exposed electrical conductors or equipment, the fence shall be bonded to the grounding electrode
system with wire-type bonding jumpers as follows:
(1) Bonding jumpers shall be installed at each fence corner
and at maximum 50 m (160 ft) intervals along the
fence.
(2) Where bare overhead conductors cross the fence, bonding
jumpers shall be installed on each side of the crossing.
(3) Gates shall be bonded to the gate support post, and
each gate support post shall be bonded to the grounding
electrode system.
(4) Any gate or other opening in the fence shall be bonded
across the opening by a buried bonding jumper.
(5) The grounding grid or grounding electrode systems
shall be extended to cover the swing of all gates.
(6) The barbed wire strands above the fence shall be
bonded to the grounding electrode system.
Change Description:
This proposal is meant to establish basic prescriptive
requirements for grounding and bonding of metal fences built in
and around substations. For situations where step and touch
potential considerations indicate additional grounding and
bonding design is required, alternate designs performed under
engineering supervision are allowed. Designers are also referred
to the industry standard on the grounding of fences in and around
substations, which is IEEE 80 Guide for Safety In AC Substation
Grounding.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – Typically IEEE 80 is followed in design of
substation fence grounding.
Alternate designs performed under engineering supervision shall be permitted for grounding or bonding of metal
fences.
Informational Note No. 1: A nonconducting fence or sec- tion
may provide isolation for transfer of voltage to other areas.
Informational Note No. 2: See IEEE 80-2000, IEEE Guide for
Safety In AC Substation Grounding, for design and installation of fence grounding.
Page 41 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(B) Metal Structures. All exposed conductive metal structures, including guy wires within 2.5 m (8 ft) vertically or
5 m (16 ft) horizontally of exposed conductors or equipment and subject to contact by persons, shall be bonded to
the grounding electrode systems in the area.
ARTICLE 285
Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), 1000 Volts or less
285.13 Type 4 and Other Component Type SPDs. Type
Change Description:
4 component assemblies and other component type SPDs
Type 4 and 5 SPDs are not standalone devices and are only
shall only be installed by the equipment manufacturer.
acceptable if provided as a part of listed equipment. This new
section makes it into a requirement.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 300
General Requirements for Wiring Methods and Materials
300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling,
Change Description:
Fabricated Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other
Section updated to allow MI cable without an overall nonmetallic
Spaces for Environmental Air (Plenums).
covering for use in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling, Fabricated
Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other Spaces for Environmental
(B) Ducts Specifically Fabricated for Environmental
Air (Plenums). This aligns this section with the wiring methods
Air. Equipment, devices, and devices the wiring methods
specified in this section shall be permitted within such
described in NFPA 90A.
ducts only if necessary for the direct action upon, or sensing of, the contained air. Where equipment or devices are
installed and illumination is necessary to facilitate maintenance and repair, enclosed gasketed-type luminaires shall
be permitted.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – Typically NFPA 90A requirements are
followed in design.
Only wiring methods consisting of Type MI cable without
an overall nonmetallic covering, Type MC cable employing a smooth or corrugated impervious metal sheath
without an overall nonmetallic covering, electrical metallic
Page 42 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
tubing, flexible metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit,
or rigid metal conduit without an overall nonmetallic covering shall be installed in ducts specifically fabricated to
transport environmental air. Flexible metal conduit shall be
permitted, in lengths not to exceed 1.2 m (4 ft), to connect
physically adjustable equipment and devices permitted to
be in these fabricated ducts. The connectors used with flexible metal conduit shall effectively close any openings in
the connection.
300.22 Wiring in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling,
Fabricated Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other
Spaces for Environmental Air (Plenums).
(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). This section shall apply to spaces not specifically
fabricated for environmental air-handling purposes but used
for air-handling purposes as a plenum. This section shall
not apply to habitable rooms or areas of buildings, the
prime purpose of which is not air handling.
(1) Wiring Methods. The wiring methods for such other
space shall be limited to totally enclosed, nonventilated,
insulated busway having no provisions for plug-in connections, Type MI cable without an overall nonmetallic covering, Type MC cable without an overall nonmetallic covering, Type AC cable, or other factory-assembled
multiconductor control or power cable that is specifically
listed for use within an air-handling space, or listed prefabricated cable assemblies of metallic manufactured wiring
systems without nonmetallic sheath. Other types of cables,
conductors, and raceways shall be permitted to be installed
in electrical metallic tubing, flexible metallic tubing, intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit without an overall nonmetallic covering, flexible metal conduit, or, where
accessible, surface metal raceway or metal wireway with
metal covers.
Nonmetallic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories used to secure and support cables shall be listed
as having low smoke and heat release properties.
Change Description:
Section updated to allow MI cable without an overall nonmetallic
covering for use in Ducts Not Used for Air Handling, Fabricated
Ducts for Environmental Air, and Other Spaces for Environmental
Air (Plenums). This aligns this section with the wiring methods
described in NFPA 90A. In addition, this section now requires that
cable ties and other cable accessories be listed as having low
smoke and low heat generation characteristics.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – Typically NFPA 90A requirements are
followed in design.
Page 43 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
300.38 Raceways in Wet Locations Above Grade. Where
raceways are installed in wet locations above grade, the
interior of these raceways shall be considered to be a wet
location. Insulated conductors and cables installed in raceways in wet locations above grade shall comply with
310.10(C).
Change Description:
This section applies to systems with voltages over 1000 V and
addresses requirements for raceways in wet locations, above
ground, aligning it with Section 300.9 for voltages below 1000 V.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
300.45 Warning Signs. Warning signs shall be conspicuously posted at points of access to conductors in all conduit
systems and cable systems. The warning sign(s) shall be
legible and permanent and shall carry the following wording:
DANGER—HIGH VOLTAGE—KEEP OUT
Change Description:
Added new section to address warning signs at the points of
access to conductors operating at voltages above 1000 V. This
requirement already exists in articles 314 and 490 (previously in
225).
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
300.50 Underground Installations.
(A) General. Underground conductors shall be identified
for the voltage and conditions under which they are installed. Direct-burial cables shall comply with the provisions of 310.10(F). Underground cables shall be installed in
accordance with 300.50(A)(1) ,(A)(2), or (A)(23), and the
installation shall meet the depth requirements of Table
300.50.
(2) Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments, where conditions of maintenance and supervision
ensure that only qualified persons service the installed
cable, nonshielded single-conductor cables with insulation
types up to 2000 volts that are listed for direct burial shall
be permitted to be directly buried.
Change Description:
It is a common practice in large utility-scale solar installations to
direct bury 2000V rated conductors used to carry power from
combiner boxes to the inverter. Since these installations are not
accessible to the public and maintenance is controlled by the
facility owner, direct buried single conductor installations are
appropriate. There are already Listed PV wire products rated at
2000 volts and listed for direct burial, and placing this language in
Article 300 ensures that the NEC is ready for other nonPV installations and similarly listed cable types that may be
developed in the future. Having the language in 300.50 makes it
easy for the code user to reference and apply the appropriate
installation requirements, such as depth of burial and warning
tape.
Impact(s) :
Page 44 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 310
Conductors for General Wiring
310.15 Ampacities for Conductors Rated 0–2000 Volts.
Change Description:
Exception was added recognizing that cross-linked synthetic
(B) Tables.
polymer insulation (XHHW-2) is not subject to the melting when
exposed to higher temperatures expected on the roof tops. The
(3) Adjustment Factors.
failure temperature of this type of insulation is in temperatures
(c) Circular Raceways and Cables Exposed to Sunlight
over 300°C and installations using XHHW-2 type conductors
on Rooftops. Where conductorsraceways or cables are inshow no signs of failure even when fully loaded and installed in
stalled in circular raceways exposed to direct sunlight on or
the hottest regions of the country.
above rooftops, the adjustments shown in Table
310.15(B)(3)(c) shall be added to the outdoor temperature
to determine the applicable ambient temperature for application of the correction factors in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) or
Table 310.15(B)(2)(b).
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: Type XHHW-2 insulated conductors shall not
be subject to this ampacity adjustment.
ARTICLE 314
Outlet, Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes; Conduit Bodies: Fittings, and Handholes
314.15 Damp or Wet Locations. In damp or wet locaChange Description:
tions, boxes, conduit bodies, outlet box hoods, and fittings
The Code now recognizes a common practice of adding weep
shall be placed or equipped so as to prevent moisture from
holes in the field to prevent accumulation of condensed moisture
entering or accumulating within the box, conduit body, or
in boxes. This change will improve durability and safety of the
fitting. Boxes, conduit bodies, outlet box hoods, and
installations.
fittings installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in
wet locations. Approved drainage openings not larger than 6
mm (1⁄4 in.) shall be permitted to be installed in the field
in boxes or conduit bodies listed for use in damp or wet
locations. For installa- tion of listed drain fittings, larger
openings are permitted to be installed in the field in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
314.16 Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and
Junction Boxes, and Conduit Bodies.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change adds a clarity regarding box fill calculation and
Page 45 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
considering clamp assemblies in determining a box volume.
(B) Box Fill Calculations.
(2) Clamp Fill. Where one or more internal cable clamps,
whether factory or field supplied, are present in the box, a
single volume allowance in accordance with Table
314.16(B) shall be made based on the largest conductor
present in the box. No allowance shall be required for a
cable connector with its clamping mechanism outside the
box.
A clamp assembly that incorporates a cable termination for
the cable conductors shall be listed and marked for use with
specific nonmetallic boxes. Conductors that originate within
the clamp assembly shall be included in conductor fill
calculations covered in 314.16(B)(1) as though they entered
from outside the box. The clamp assembly shall not require
a fill allowance, but the volume of the portion of the
assembly that remains within the box after installation shall
be excluded from the box volume as marked in
314.16(A)(2).
314.25 Covers and Canopies. In completed installations,
each box shall have a cover, faceplate, lampholder, or luminaire canopy, except where the installation complies with
410.24(B). Screws used for the purpose of attaching covers,
or other equipment, to the box shall be either machine
screws matching the thread gauge or size that is integral to
the box or shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change ensures that only screws appropriate for the box are
used to attach covers and other equipment. This will prevent use
of screws not matching the thread gauge or size and minimize
chances for damaging the box in the process of attaching covers
or other equipment to the boxes.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
314.28 Pull and Junction Boxes and Conduit Bodies.
(A) Minimum Size.
(3) Smaller Dimensions. Boxes Listed boxes or listed
Change Description:
This change allows use of Table 1 (Chapter 9) in establishing
number of conductors to be installed in listed conduit bodies
meeting conditions described in this section.
Page 46 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
conduit bodies of dimensions less than those required in
314.28(A)(1) and (A)(2) shall be permitted for installations
of combinations of conductors that are less than the maximum conduit or tubing fill (of conduits or tubing being
used) permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9, provided the box
or conduit body has been listed for, and is permanently
marked with, the maximum number and maximum size of
conductors permitted.
Listed conduit bodies of dimensions less than those required in 314.28(A)(2), and having a radius of the curve to
the centerline not less than that indicated in Table 2 of
Chapter 9 for one-shot and full-shoe benders, shall be permitted for installations of combinations of conductors permitted by Table 1 of Chapter 9. These conduit bodies shall
be marked to show they have been specifically evaluated in
accordance with this provision.
Where the permitted combinations of conductors for
which the box or conduit body has been listed are less than
the maximum conduit or tubing fill permitted by Table 1 of
Chapter 9, the box or conduit body shall be permanently
marked with the maximum number and maximum size of
conductors permitted.
330.10 Uses Permitted.
(A) General Uses. Type MC cable shall be permitted as
follows:
(11) In wet locations where a corrosion-resistant jacket is
provided over the metallic covering and any of the
following conditions are met:
a. The metallic covering is impervious to moisture.
b. A moisture-impervious jacket resistant to moisture
is provided under the metal covering.
c. The insulated conductors under the metallic cover- ing
are listed for use in wet locations, and a corrosion-
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 330
Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC
Change Description:
The revised wording is consistent with the requirements for
jackets in UL 1569, which contains the performance requirements
that define resistance to moisture.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 47 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
resistant jacket is provided over the metallic
sheath.locations.
330.30 Securing and Supporting.
(B) Securing. Unless otherwise provided, cables shall be
secured at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Cables containing four or fewer conductors sized no larger than 10
AWG shall be secured within 300 mm (12 in.) of every
box, cabinet, fitting, or other cable termination. In vertical
installations, listed cables with ungrounded conductors 250
kcmil and larger shall be permitted to be secured at intervals not exceeding 3 m (10 ft)
330.30 Securing and Supporting.
(D) Unsupported Cables. Type MC cable shall be permitted to be unsupported where the cable:
(3) Is Type MC of the interlocked armor type in lengths
not exceeding 900 mm (3 ft) from the last point where it is
securely fastened and is used to connect equipment where
flexibility is necessary to minimize the transmission of
vibration from equipment or to provide flexibility for
equipment that requires movement after installation.
Change Description:
Increased support spacing requirements for MC cables with
conductors 250 kcmil and larger in vertical installations based on
UL Report 12ME07391 demonstrating acceptability of this
change.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change allows the use of a MC cable of the interlocked
armor type in applications requiring flexibility at terminations with
the last support 3 ft or less from the termination point.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 334
Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable: Types NM, NMC, and NMS
334.40 Boxes and Fittings.
Change Description:
Clarified the language in this section by changing term “rewiring”
(B) Devices of Insulating Material. Switch,Self(typically associated with pulling new wires) to “repair”. This
contained switches,outlet, self-contained receptacles, and
change also makes it acceptable to install listed self-contained
tap nonmetallic-sheathed cable interconnector devices of
devices without boxes in exposed or concealed wiring in existing
insulating material that are listed shall be permitted to be
used without boxes in exposed cable wiring and for rewirbuildings.
ingrepair wiring in existing buildings where the cable is
concealed and fished.concealed. Openings in such devices
shall form a close fit around the outer covering of the cable,
and the device shall fully enclose the part of the cable from
which any part of the covering has been removed. Where
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 48 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
connections to conductors are by binding-screw terminals,
there shall be available as many terminals as conductors.
ARTICLE 338
Service-Entrance Cable: Types SE and USE
338.10 Uses Permitted.
Change Description:
This new exception removes the requirement to apply 60°C
(B) Branch Circuits or Feeders.
ampacity rating limitation per 340.80 to USE type cables, which
have higher than 60°C temperature rating.
(4) Installation Methods for Branch Circuits and Feed-
2
ers.
(b) Exterior Installations. In addition to the provisions of
this article, service-entrance cable used for feeders or branch
circuits, where installed as exterior wiring, shall be installed
in accordance with Part I of Article 225. The cable shall be
supported in accordance with 334.30. Type USE cable
installed as underground feeder and branch circuit cable shall
comply with Part II of Article 340.
Exception:
Single-conductor Type USE and multi-rated
USE conductors shall not be subject to the ampacity limitations of Part II of Article 340.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 348
Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC
348.30 Securing and Supporting.
Change Description:
This change allows considering listed flexible metal conduit
(A) Securely Fastened.
fittings as means of support for the purpose of complying with the
code, similar to the provisions for AC and MC type cables (320.30
Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from
and 330.30, respectively).
the last point where the raceway is securely fastened for
Impact(s) :
connections within an accessible ceiling to a luminaire(s)
or other equipment. For the purposes of this exception,
No negative impact.
listed flexible metal conduit fittings shall be permitted as a
means of support.
ARTICLE 350
Page 49 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC
350.30 Securing and Supporting.
Change Description:
Companion change to 348.30 - this change allows considering
(A) Securely Fastened.
listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit fittings as means of support
for the purpose of complying with the code, similar to the
Exception No. 4: Lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft) from
provisions for AC and MC type cables (320.30 and 330.30,
the last point where the raceway is securely fastened for
respectively).
connections within an accessible ceiling to a luminaire(s)
or other equipment. For the purposes of this exception,
listed LFMC fittings shall be permitted as a means of
support.
350.42 Couplings and Connectors. Only fittings listed for
use with LFMC shall be used. Angle connectors shall not
be concealed. Straight LFMC fittings shall be permitted for
direct burial where marked.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change identifies limitations for LFMC fittings. It also
harmonizes these provisions with the same provisions for LFNC
in Section 356.42.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 356
Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Type LFNC
356.12 Uses Not Permitted. LFNC shall not be used as
Change Description:
follows:
This change removes the application limitation for LFNC to below
600 V installations. This change is based on the listing for LFNC
(4) Where the operating voltage of the contained conduc(UL 1660 and UL White Book, DXOQ) which do not limit LFNC to
tors is in excess of 600 volts, nominal, except as per- mitted
600 V.
in 600.32(A).
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
356.30 Securing and Supporting. Type LFNC-B shall
Change Description:
be securely fastened and supported in accordance with
Companion change to 348.30 - this change allows considering
one of the following:
listed liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit fittings as means of
support for the purpose of complying with the code, similar to the
4) Securing or supporting of LFNC-B shall not be reprovisions for AC and MC type cables (320.30 and 330.30,
quired where installed in lengths not exceeding 1.8 m (6
Page 50 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ft) from the last point where the raceway is securely
fastened for connections within an accessible ceiling to a
luminaire(s) or other equipment. For the purpose of
356.30, listed liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
fittings shall be permitted as a means of support.
respectively).
356.60 Grounding and Bonding.Grounding. Where used
to connect equipment where flexibility grounding is required, an a separate equipment grounding conductor shall
be installed in the conduit.
Where required or installed, equipment grounding conductors shall be installed in accordance with 250.134(B).
Where required or installed, equipment bonding jumpers
shall be installed in accordance with 250.102.
Change Description:
This change provides more clarity and harmonizes equipment
grounding requirements applicable to LFNC with requirements for
other nonmetallic raceways.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception No. 1: As permitted in 250.134(B), Exception
No. 2, for dc circuits and 250.134(B), Exception No. 1, for
separately run equipment grounding conductors.
Exception No. 2: Where the grounded conductor is used to
ground equipment as permitted in 250.142.
The text of this reorganized article not
included for brevity.
ARTICLE 370
Cablebus
Change Description:
Article 370 was reorganized in its entirety to more closely follow
Chapter 3 numbering system.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
376.56 Splices, Taps, and Power Distribution Blocks.
(B) Power Distribution Blocks.
(1) Installation. Power distribution blocks installed in
metal wireways shall be listed. Power distribution blocks
ARTICLE 376
Metal Wireways
Change Description:
Added language clarifies the expectation that the power
distribution blocks installed on the line side of the service
equipment shall be listed for that purpose. In (5) the added text
Page 51 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
installed on the line side of the service equipment shall be
listed for the purpose.
ensures that the conductors do not obstruct block terminals – this
requirement is consistent with 314.28(E) applicable to boxes.
(5) Conductors. Conductors shall be arranged so the
power distribution block terminals are unobstructed following installation.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
386.120 Marking. Each length of surface metal raceway
shall be clearly and durably identified as required in the
first sentence of 110.21(A).
ARTICLE 386
Surface Metal Raceways
Change Description:
This addition of the clause covering marking to bring consistency
with the requirements in other articles for similar products.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 388
Surface Nonmetallic Raceways
388.120 Marking. Surface nonmetallic raceways that have
Change Description:
limited smoke-producing characteristics shall be permitted to
This addition of the clause covering marking to bring consistency
be so identified. Each length of surface nonmetallic race- way
with the requirements in other articles for similar products.
shall be clearly and durably identified as required in the
2
first sentence of 110.21(A).
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
392.18 Cable Tray Installation.
(H) Marking. Cable trays containing conductors rated
over 600 volts shall have a permanent, legible warning
notice carrying the wording “DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP AWAY” placed in a readily visible position
on all cable trays, with the spacing of warning notices not
to exceed 3 m (10 ft). The danger marking(s) or labels shall
ARTICLE 392
Cable Trays
Change Description:
The added exception for industrial applications eliminates the
requirement for marking cable trays containing conductors rated
over 600V, if the cable tray is not accessible.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
Page 52 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
comply with 110.21(B).
Exception: Where not accessible (as applied to equipment), in industrial establishments where the conditions of
maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified
persons service the installation, cable tray system warning
notices shall be located where necessary for the installation
to ensure safe maintenance and operation.
392.20 Cable and Conductor Installation.
(A) Multiconductor Cables
RatedOperating at
600Volts or Less. Multiconductor cables rated operating at
600 volts or less shall be permitted to be installed in the
same cable tray.
(B) Cables RatedOperating at Over 600 Volts. Cables
rated operating at over 600 volts and those ratedoperating
at 600 volts or less installed in the same cable tray shall
comply with either of the following:
(1) The cables ratedoperating at over 600 volts are Type
MC.
(2) The cables rated operating at over 600 volts are separated from the cables ratedoperating at 600 volts or less
by a solid fixed barrier of a material compatible with
the cable tray.
Change Description:
Replaced term “rated” with “operating at” within the subsection to
allow selection of conductor insulation level based on maximum
circuit voltage applied to any conductor within the enclosure or
raceway, rather than the insulation rating itself.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 393
Low-Voltage Suspended Ceiling Power Distribution Systems
The text of this new article not included for
Change Description:
Added a new Article covering the installation of low-voltage Class
brevity.
2 ac and dc suspended ceiling power distribution systems.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – improves safety by providing specific
requirements for the systems until now not addressed by the
code.
ARTICLE 400
Page 53 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
400.4 Types. Flexible cords and flexible cables shall conform to the description in Table 400.4. Types 400.4. The
use of flexible cords and flexible cables other than those
listed in the tableTable 400.4 shall be the subject of special
investigation.require permission by the authority having jurisdiction.
400.5 Ampacities for Flexible Cords and Cables.
(A) Ampacity Tables. Table 400.5(A)(1) provides the allowable ampacities, and Table 400.5(A)(2) provides the
ampacities for flexible cords and cables with not more than
three current-carrying conductors. These tables shall be
used in conjunction with applicable end-use product standards to ensure selection of the proper size and type. Where
cords and cables are used in ambient temperatures other
than 30°C (86°F), the temperature correction factors from
Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) that correspond to the temperature
rating of the cord or cable shall be applied to the ampacity in
Table 400.5(A)(1) and Table 400.5(A)(2). Cords and
cables rated 105°C shall use correction factors in the 90°C
column of Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) for temperature correc- tion.
Where the number of current-carrying conductors ex- ceeds
three, the allowable ampacity or the ampacity of each
conductor shall be reduced from the 3three-conductor rating as shown in Table 400.5(A)(3).
Flexible Cords and Cables
Change Description:
This change requires that flexible cords not listed in Table 400.4
be approved by AHJ prior to application.
2
Impact(s) :
Any NEC unlisted flexible cords will require evaluation.
Change Description:
This change corrects an omission in the 2011 edition of the code
which did not require application of temperature correction factors
to cables listed in Table 400.5(A)(1).
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Expanded marking requirements for flexible cords and cables to
(A) Standard Markings. Flexible cords and cables shall be include maximum operating temperature.
400.6 Markings.
marked by means of a printed tag attached to the coil reel or
carton. The tag shall contain the information required in
310.120(A). Types S, SC, SCE, SCT, SE, SEO, SEOO, SJ, Impact(s) :
SJE, SJEO, SJEOO, SJO, SJT, SJTO, SJTOO, SO, SOO, ST, No negative impact.
STO, STOO, SEW, SEOW, SEOOW, SJEW, SJEOW,
SJEOOW, SJOW, SJTW, SJTOW, SJTOOW, SOW,
SOOW, STW, STOW, and STOOW flexible cords and G, G-
Page 54 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
GC, PPE, and W flexible cables shall be durably marked on
the surface at intervals not exceeding 610 mm (24 in.) with the
type designation, size, and number of conductors. Required
markings on tags, cords, and cables shall also include the
maximum operating temperature of the flexible cord or cable.
400.7 Uses Permitted.
(A) Uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be used only for
the following:
(11) Between an existing receptacle outlet and an inlet,
where the inlet provides power to an additional single
receptacle outlet. The wiring interconnecting the inlet
to the single receptacle outlet shall be a Chapter 3 wiring
method. The inlet, receptacle outlet, and Chapter 3 wiring
method, including the flexible cord and fittings, shall be a
listed assembly specific for this application.
Change Description:
This new provision expands the use of flexible cords and cables
to allow new listed products primarily used for flat-screen TV
mounted on the wall.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
400.23 Equipment Grounding Conductor Identification. A conductor intended to be used as an equipment
grounding conductor shall have a continuous identifying
marker readily distinguishing it from the other conductor or
conductors. Conductors having a continuous green color or
a continuous green color with one or more yellow stripes
shall not be used for other than equipment grounding conductors. Cords or cables consisting of integral insulation
and a jacket without a nonintegral grounding conductor
shall be permitted to be green. The identifying marker shall
consist of one of the methods in 400.23(A) or (B).
Change Description:
This change allows the use of green color for cords or cables with
integral insulation and jacket and without a nonintegral grounding
conductor.
III. Portable Cables Over 600 Volts, Nominal
400.31 Construction.
(B) Equipment Grounding Conductor(s). An equipment
grounding conductor(s) shall be provided in cables with
three or more conductors. The total area shall not be less
than that of the size of the equipment grounding conductor
required in 250.122.
Change Description:
Clarifies that two conductor cables are acceptable without a
grounding conductor.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 55 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
404.2 Switch Connections.
(C) Switches Controlling Lighting Loads. Where
switches control lighting loads supplied by a general purpose branch circuit, the The grounded circuit conductor for
the controlled lighting circuit shall be provided at the
switch location.location where switches control lighting
loads that are supplied by a grounded general-purpose
branch circuit for other than the following:
Exception: The grounded circuit conductor shall be permitted to be omitted from the switch enclosure where either
of the following conditions in (1) or (2) apply:
ARTICLE 404
Switches
Change Description:
This change rearranges the Section for clarity and adds five new
conditions for which a grounded conductor does not have to be
provided at the lighting switch location to accommodate common
situation where bringing the grounded conductor would not
improve safety or serve other purposes.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) Conductors for switches controlling lighting loads enter the box through a raceway. The raceway shall have
suffıcient cross-sectional area to accommodate the extension of the grounded circuit conductor of the lighting circuit to the switch location whether or not the
conductors in the raceway are required to be increased
in size to comply with 310.15(B)(3)(a). Where conductors enter the box enclosing the switch through a raceway, provided that the raceway is large enough for all
contained conductors, including a grounded conductor.
(2) Cable assemblies for switches controlling lighting
loads enter the box through a framing cavity that is
open at the top or bottom on the same floor level, or
through a wall, floor, or ceiling that is unfinished on
one side.Where the box enclosing the switch is accessible for the installation of an additional or replacement
cable without removing finish materials
(3) Where snap switches with integral enclosures comply
with 300.15(E)
(4) Where a switch does not serve a habitable room or
Page 56 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
bathroom
(5) Where multiple switch locations control the same lighting load such that the entire floor area of the room or
space is visible from the single or combined switch
locations
(6) Where lighting in the area is controlled by automatic
means
(7) Where a switch controls a receptacle load
404.8 Accessibility and Grouping.
(C) Multipole Snap Switches. A multipole, general-use
snap switch shall not be permitted to be fed from more than
a single circuit unless it is listed and marked as a twocircuit or three-circuit switch, or unless its voltage rating is
not less than the nominal line-to-line voltage of the system
supplying the circuits.switch.
404.10 Mounting of Snap Switches.
(B) Box Mounted. Flush-type snap switches mounted in
boxes that are set back of the finished surface as permitted
in 314.20 shall be installed so that the extension plaster ears
are seated against the surface. Flush-type snap switches
mounted in boxes that are flush with the finished surface or
project from it shall be installed so that the mounting yoke
or strap of the switch is seated against the box. Screws used
for the purpose of attaching a snap switch to a box shall be
of the type provided with a listed snap switch, or shall be
machine screws having 32 threads per inch or part of listed
assemblies or systems, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Change Description:
The language added in 2008 NEC allowing use of snap switches
on more than a single branch circuit is removed from this edition
of the code for switches not specifically listed for such an
application.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change provides specific requirements for screws used in
mounting snap switches to ensure that inappropriate screws
which could potentially damage the switch are not being utilized.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 406
Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)
406.3 Receptacle Rating and Type.
Change Description:
This change introduces a requirement for marking automatically
Page 57 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(E) Controlled Receptacle Marking. All nonlockingtype, 125-volt, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles that are controlled by an automatic control device, or that incorporate
control features that remove power from the outlet for the
purpose of energy management or building automation,
shall be marked with the symbol shown in Figure 406.3(E)
and located on the controlled receptacle outlet where visible after installation.
controlled receptacles.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: The marking is not required for receptacles
controlled by a wall switch that provide the required room
lighting outlets as permitted by 210.70.
406.4 General Installation Requirements.
(A) Grounding Type. Except as provided in 406.4(D),
Rreceptacles installed on 15- and 20-ampere branch circuits
shall be of the grounding type. Grounding-type receptacles
shall be installed only on circuits of the voltage class and
current for which they are rated, except as provided in
Table 210.21(B)(2) and Table 210.21(B)(3).
Exception: Nongrounding-type receptacles installed in accordance with 406.4(D).
Change Description:
This requirement expands the accessibility of receptacles
requiring testing (GFCI, AFCI) to replacement receptacles. Also,
a new exception allows replacement of a receptacle which would
otherwise be required to be of a GFCI type with the existing type
(not GFCI) if the receptacle is protected by an upstream GFCI
device.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
D) Replacements. Replacement of receptacles shall comply with 406.4(D)(1) through (D)(6), as applicable. Arcfault circuit-interrupter type and ground-fault circuitinterrupter type receptacles shall be installed in a readily
accessible location.
(3) Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters. Ground-fault
circuit-interrupter protected receptacles shall be provided
where replacements are made at receptacle outlets that are
required to be so protected elsewhere in this Code.
Exception: Where replacement of the receptacle type is
impracticable, such as where the outlet box size will not
permit the installation of the GFCI receptacle, the recep-
Page 58 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
tacle shall be permitted to be replaced with a new receptacle of the existing type, where GFCI protection is provided and the receptacle is marked “GFCI protected” and
“no equipment ground,” in accordance with 406.4(D)(2)
(a), (b), or (c).
406.5 Receptacle Mounting. Receptacles shall be
mounted in identified boxes or assemblies designed for the
purpose, and suchassemblies. The boxes or assemblies shall
be securely fastened in place unless otherwise permitted
elsewhere in this Code. Screws used for the purpose of
attaching receptacles to a box shall be of the type provided
with a listed receptacle, or shall be machine screws having
32 threads per inch or part of listed assemblies or systems,
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Change Description:
This change provides specific requirements for screws used in
mounting receptacles to ensure that inappropriate screws which
could potentially damage the receptacle are not being utilized.
406.5 Receptacle Mounting.
Change Description:
This change expands requirements for receptacles mounted in
countertops (face-up) to all occupancies and provides criteria for
GFCI protection. It also adds specific criteria for receptacles in
seating areas in a face-up position.
(E) Receptacles in Countertops and Similar Work Surfaces in Dwelling Units.Surfaces. Receptacles, unless
listed as receptacle assemblies for countertop applications,
shall not be installed in a face-up position in countertops or
similar work surfaces. Where receptacle assemblies for
countertop applications are required to provide ground-fault
circuit-interrupter protection for personnel in accordance
with 210.8, such assemblies shall be permitted to be listed
as GFCI receptacle assemblies for countertop applications.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(F) Receptacles in Seating Areas and Other Similar
Surfaces. In seating areas or similar surfaces, receptacles
shall not be installed in a face-up position unless the receptacle is any of the following:
(1) Part of an assembly listed as a furniture power
distribution unit, if cord-and plug-connected
2) Part of an assembly listed either as household
furnishings or as commercial furnishings
(3) Listed either as a receptacle assembly for countertop
applications or as a GFCI receptacle assembly for
Page 59 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
countertop applications
(4) Installed in a listed floor box
406.9 Receptacles in Damp or Wet Locations.
(B) Wet Locations.
(1) Receptacles of 15 and 20-Amperes Receptacles in a
Wet Location. 15- and 20-ampere, 125- Receptacles of 15
and 250-volt receptacles20 amperes, 125 and 250 volts
installed in a wet loca- tion shall have an enclosure that is
weatherproof whether or not the attachment plug cap is
inserted. For other than one- or two-family dwellings, an
An outlet box hood installed for this purpose shall be
listed and where installed on an enclosure supported from
grade as described in 314.23(B) or as described in
314.23(F) shall be identified as “extra duty.” All 15and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt nonlocking-type
receptacles shall be listed weather- resistant type.
406.15 Dimmer-Controlled Receptacles. A receptacle
supplying lighting loads shall not be connected to a dimmer
unless the plug/receptacle combination is a nonstandard
configuration type that is specifically listed and identified
for each such unique combination.
Change Description:
Revision to this section expands requirements for an “extra duty”
outlet box hood in wet locations, regardless of occupancy and
enclosure mounting method.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
New section added restricting regarding dimmer control of
receptacles.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 408
Switchboards, Switchgear, and Panelboards
408.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars and ConChange Description:
ductors.
This new subsection provides criteria for DC bus arrangement.
(E) Bus Arrangement.
Impact(s) :
(2) DC Bus Arrangement. Direct-current ungrounded buses No negative impact.
shall be permitted to be in any order. Arrangement of dc buses
shall be field marked as to polarity, grounding system, and
Page 60 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
nominal voltage.
408.3 Support and Arrangement of Busbars and Conductors.
(F) Switchboard, Switchgear, or Panelboard Identification.
(3) High-Impedance Grounded Neutral AC System. A
switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard containing a highimpedance grounded neutral ac system in accordance with
250.36 shall be legibly and permanently field marked as
follows:
Change Description:
This new subsection requires permanent marking of electrical
distribution equipment fed from a high-impedance grounded,
ungrounded DC, and resistively grounded DC systems.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
CAUTION: HIGH-IMPEDANCE GROUNDED NEUTRAL AC SYSTEM OPERATING —
VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND MAY OPERATE --VOLTS TO GROUND FOR INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS
(4) Ungrounded DC Systems. A switchboard, switchgear,
or panelboard containing an ungrounded dc electrical
system in accordance with 250.169 shall be legibly and
permanently field marked as follows:
CAUTION: UNGROUNDED DC SYSTEM OPERATING — VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS
(5)) Resistively Grounded DC Systems. A
switchboard, switchgear, or panelboard containing a
resistive
connection
between
current-carrying
conductors and the grounding system to stabilize
voltage to ground shall be legibly and permanently
field marked as follows:
CAUTION: DC SYSTEM OPERATING --VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS AND
MAY OPERATE —
VOLTS TO GROUND FOR
INDEFINITE PERIODS UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS
Page 61 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
408.55 Wire-Bending Space Within an Enclosure Containing a Panelboard.
(A) Top and Bottom Wire-Bending Space. The enclosure
for a panelboard shall have the top and bottom wirebending space sized in accordance with Table 312.6(B) for
the largest conductor entering or leaving the enclosure.
Side wire-bending space shall be in accordance with Table
312.6(A) for the largest conductor to be terminated in that
space.
Change Description:
The revision expands the wire bending criteria to include back
wire-bending space.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Side Wire-Bending Space. Side wire-bending space
shall be in accordance with Table 312.6(A) for the largest
conductor to be terminated in that space.
(C) Back Wire-Bending Space. Where a raceway or cable
entry is in the wall of the enclosure opposite a removable
cover, the distance from that wall to the cover shall be
permitted to comply with the distance required for one wire
per terminal in Table 312.6(A). The distance between the
center of the rear entry and the nearest termination for the
entering conductors shall not be less than the distance given
in Table 312.6(B).
ARTICLE 410
Luminaires, Lampholders, and Lamps
410.10 Luminaires in Specific Locations.
Change Description:
This new subsection provides specific requirements for a
(F) Luminaires Installed in or Under Roof Decking. Ludistance of luminaires from a metal corrugated roof decking. It
minaires installed in exposed or concealed locations under
minimizes a chance for damage of electrical components by roof
metal-corrugated sheet roof decking shall be installed and
material fasteners.
supported so there is not less than 38 mm (11⁄2 in.) meaImpact(s) :
sured from the lowest surface of the roof decking to the top
of the luminaire.
No negative impact.
410.23 Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet
Boxes. Any combustible wall or ceiling finish exposed be-
Change Description:
Page 62 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
tween the edge of a luminaire canopy or pan and an outlet
box having a surface area of 1160 mm2 (180 in.2) or more
shall be covered with noncombustible material.
This revision aligns Section 410.23 with UL 1598, ensuring that
larger boxes (not covered by UL 1598) do not overheat adjacent
combustible wall and ceiling materials.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
XII. Special Provisions for Electric-Discharge Lighting
Systems of 1000 Volts or Less
410.130 General.
Change Description:
This revision eliminates an exception for installation of disconnect
switches for electric-discharge lighting over 1000 V in industrial
establishments.
2
(G) Disconnecting Means.
(1) General. In indoor locations other than dwellings and
associated accessory structures, fluorescent luminaires that
utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can
be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means either internal or external to each luminaire. For existing
installed luminaires without disconnecting means, at the
time a ballast is replaced, a disconnecting means shall be
installed. The line side terminals of the disconnecting
means shall be guarded.
Impact(s) :
Elimination of this exception improves safety of personnel
performing maintenance/repair work on electric-discharge lighting
over 1000 V in industrial establishments.
Exception No. 4: A disconnecting means shall not be required in industrial establishments with restricted public
access where conditions of maintenance and supervision
ensure that only qualified persons service the installation
by written procedures.
ARTICLE 411
Lighting Systems Operating at 30 Volts or Less and Lighting Equipment Connected to Class 2 Power Sources
411.1 Scope. This article covers lighting systems operating
Change Description:
1
at 30 volts or less and their associated components. This
This revision provides clarification that the scope of the section
article also covers lighting equipment connected to a Class
Page 63 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
2 power source
includes lighting equipment connected to a Class 2 power source.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
411.2411.3 Definition.Low-Voltage Lighting Systems.
(A) General. Lighting Ssystems Ooperating at 30 Voltsvolts or Less. A lighting system consisting less shall consist
of an isolating power supply, the low-voltage luminaires,
and associated equipment that are all identified for the use.
The output circuits of the power supply are shall be rated
for not more than 25 amperes and operate at 30 volts (42.4
volts peak) or lessmaximum under all load conditions.
Change Description:
This revision better correlates this section with Article 725 and
Chapter 9 Tables for Class 2 listed lighting systems.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Class 2. Listed Class 2 lighting equipment shall be
rated in conformance with Chapter 9, Table 11(A) or Table
11(B).
411.3411.4 Listing Required. Lighting systems operating
at 30 volts or less shall comply with 411.3(A)411.4(A) or
411.3(B).411.4(B). Class 2 power sources and lighting
equipment connected to Class 2 power sources shall be
listed.
422.5 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection. The device providing GFCI protection required in
this article shall be readily accessible.
422.11 Overcurrent Protection. Appliances shall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with 422.11(A)
through (G) and 422.10.
(F) Electric Heating Appliances Employing Resistance-
ARTICLE 422
Appliances
Change Description:
This added section aligns requirements for accessibility of GFCI
protection device with Section 210.8.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Rearranged this section for better clarity and added low-pressure
water heater tanks and open outlet water heater vessels to the
scope.
Page 64 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Type Heating Elements Rated More Than 48 Amperes.
(3) Water Heaters and Steam Boilers. Water heaters and
steam boilers employing resistance-type Resistance-type
immersion electric heating elements contained in an
ASME-rated and stamped vessel or listed instantaneous
water heaters shall be permitted to be subdivided into circuits not exceeding 120 amperes and protected at not more
than 150 amperes. as follows:
(1) Where contained in ASME-rated and stamped vessels
(2) Where included in listed instantaneous water heaters
(3) Where installed in low-pressure water heater tanks or
open-outlet water heater vessels
422.19 Space for Conductors. Canopies of ceilingsuspended (paddle) fans and outlet boxes taken together
shall provide sufficient space so that conductors and their
connecting devices are capable of being installed in accordance with 314.16.
422.20 Outlet Boxes to Be Covered. In a completed installation, each outlet box shall be provided with a cover
unless covered by means of a ceiling-suspended (paddle)
fan canopy.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added three new sections addressing criteria for ceiling fan outlet
boxes and their installation.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
422.21 Covering of Combustible Material at Outlet
Boxes. Any combustible ceiling finish exposed between the
edge of a ceiling-suspended (paddle) fan canopy or pan and
an outlet box shall be covered with noncombustible material.
422.23 Tire Inflation and Automotive Vacuum Machines. Tire inflation machines and automotive vacuum
machines provided for public use shall be protected by a
ground-fault circuit interrupter.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for GFCI protection for tire inflation and
automotive vacuum machines provided for public use.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 65 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
422.31 Disconnection of Permanently Connected Appliances.
C) Motor-Operated Appliances Rated over 1⁄8 Horsepower. For permanently connected motor-operated appliances with motors rated over 1⁄8 horse power, the branchcircuit switch or circuit breaker shall be permitted to serve
as the disconnecting means where the switch or circuit
breaker is within sight from the appliance. The disconnecting means shall comply with 430.109 and 430.110. For
permanently connected motor-operated appliances with
motors rated over 1⁄8 hp, the disconnecting means shall
meet 422.31(C)(1) or (2).
(1) The branch-circuit switch or circuit breaker shall be
permitted to serve as the disconnecting means where the
switch or circuit breaker is within sight from the appliance.
(2) The disconnecting means shall be installed within sight
of the appliance.
422.51 Cord-and-Plug-Connected Vending Machines.
B) Other Than Cord-and Plug-Connected. Vending machines not utilizing a cord and plug connection shall be connected to a ground-fault circuit-interrupter protected circuit.
Change Description:
Section rearranged for clarity.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This new subsection expands GFCI protection to hard-wired
vending machines.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 424
Fixed Electric Space-Heating Equipment
424.66 Installation.
Change Description:
(A) General. Duct heaters shall be installed in accordance
The addition to this section provides specific criteria for electric
with the manufacturer’s instructions in such a manner that
space heaters that are mounted on duct systems.
operation does not create a hazard to persons or property.
Furthermore, duct heaters shall be located with respect to
building construction and other equipment so as to permit
access to the heater. Sufficient clearance shall be maintained to permit replacement of controls and heating ele-
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 66 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ments and for adjusting and cleaning of controls and other
parts requiring such attention. See 110.26.
Working space about electrical enclosures for resistance
heating element–type duct heaters that are mounted on duct
systems and contain equipment that requires examination,
adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall
comply with 424.66(B).
(B) Limited Access. Where the enclosure is located in a
space above a ceiling, all of the following shall apply:
(1) The enclosure shall be accessible through a lay-in type
ceiling or an access panel(s).
(2) The width of the working space shall be the width of
the enclosure or a minimum of 762 mm (30 in.), whichever is greater.
(3) All doors or hinged panels shall open to at least 90
degrees.
(4) The space in front of the enclosure shall comply with
the depth requirements of Table 110.26(A)(1). A horizontal ceiling T-bar shall be permitted in this space.
ARTICLE 430
Motors, Motor Circuits, and Controllers
430.52 Rating or Setting for Individual Motor Circuit.
Change Description:
(C) Rating or Setting.
Clarified language addressing fusing for protection of electronic
(5) Power Electronic Devices. SuitableSemiconductor
devices and expanded protection coverage to include associated
fuses intended for the protection of electronic devices shall
electromechanical devices and conductors.
be permitted in lieu of devices listed in Table 430.52 for
power electronic devices, associated electromechanical devices (such as bypass contactors and isolation contactors),
and conductors in a solid-state motor controller system,
provided that the marking for replacement fuses is provided
adjacent to the fuses.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
430.53 Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit.
(D) Single Motor Taps. For group installations described
above, the conductors of any tap supplying a single motor
shall not be required to have an individual branch-circuit
short-circuit and ground-fault protective device, provided
Change Description:
The revised language in (2) clarifies where the 25 ft
measurement is intended to reference, and improves readability.
The revised language in (3) clarifies that the 10ft tap rule applies
Page 67 of 203
2
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
they comply with one of the following:
(2) No conductor to the motor shall have an ampacity less
than one-third that of the branch-circuit conductors,
with a minimum in accordance with 430.22, the. The
conductors from the point of the tap to the motor overload device being shall be not more than 7.5 m (25 ft)
long and beingbe protected from physical damage by
being enclosed in an approved raceway or by use of
other approved means.
(3) Conductors from the branch-circuit short-circuit and
ground-fault protective device to a listed manual motor
controller additionally marked “Suitable for Tap Conductor Protection in Group Installations,” or to a
branch-circuit protective device, shall be permitted to have
an ampacity not less than one-tenth the rating or setting of
the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground- fault
protective device. The conductors from the controller to
the motor shall have an ampacity in accordance with
430.22. The conductors from the branch-circuit shortcircuit and ground-fault protective device point of the tap to
the controller(s) shall (1) be suitably protected from
physical damage and enclosed either by an enclosed
controller or by a raceway and be not more than 3 m (10 ft)
long or (2) have an ampacity not less than that of the
branch-circuit conductors
to the tap conductors and is consistent with (2).
430.130 Branch-Circuit Short-Circuit and GroundFault Protection for Single Motor Circuits Containing
Power Conversion Equipment.
(A) Circuits Containing Power Conversion Equipment.
Circuits containing power conversion equipment shall be
protected by a branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault
protective device in accordance with the following:
(1) The rating and type of protection shall be determined by
430.52(C)(1), (C)(3), (C)(5), or (C)(6), using the full-load
current rating of the motor load as determined by 430.6.
(2) Where maximum branch-circuit short-circuit and
ground-fault protective ratings are stipulated for specific
Change Description:
New sections 430.130 and 430.131 are proposed to deal with the
special requirements of the adjustable speed drive controller
overcurrent protection functions.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 68 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
device types in the manufacturer’s instructions for the
power conversion equipment or are otherwise marked on
the equipment, they shall not be exceeded even if higher
values are permitted by 430.130(A)(1).
(3) A self-protected combination controller shall only be
permitted where specifically identified in the manufacturer’s instructions for the power conversion equipment or if
otherwise marked on the equipment.
(B) Bypass Circuit/Device. Branch-circuit short-circuit
and ground-fault protection shall also be provided for a
bypass circuit/device(s). Where a single branch-circuit
short-circuit and ground-fault protective device is provided
for circuits containing both power conversion equipment
and a bypass circuit, the branch-circuit protective device
type and its rating or setting shall be in accordance with
those determined for the power conversion equipment and
for the bypass circuit/device(s) equipment.
430.131 Several Motors or Loads on One Branch Circuit Including Power Conversion Equipment. For installations meeting all the requirements of 430.53 that include
one or more power converters, the branch-circuit shortcircuit and ground-fault protective fuses or inverse time
circuit breakers shall be of a type and rating or setting
permitted for use with the power conversion equipment
using the full-load current rating of the connected motor
load in accordance with 430.53. For the purposes of 430.53
and 430.131, power conversion equipment shall be considered to be a motor controller.
445.11 Marking. Each generator shall be provided with a
nameplate giving the manufacturer’s name, the rated fre-
ARTICLE 445
Generators
Change Description:
This revision expands the requirements for marking generators
Page 69 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
quency, power factor, the number of phases if of alternating
current, ac, the subtransient and transient impedances, the
rating in kilowatts or kilovolt-amperes, the normal volts
and amperes corresponding to the rating, the rated revolutions per minute, insulation system class and the rated ambient temperature or rated temperature rise, and time rating.
rise.
Nameplates for all stationary generators and portable
generators rated more than 15 kW shall also give the power
factor, the subtransient and transient impedances, the insulation system class, and the time rating.
Marking shall be provided by the manufacturer to indicate
whether or not the generator neutral is bonded to the
generator frame. Where the bonding of a generator is modified in the field, additional marking shall be required to
indicate whether the generator neutral is bonded to the generator frame.
rated above 15 kW to include additional information required for
the supplemental power system designer and the end user.
Some of the information to be provided on the nameplate is no
longer required for generators rated 15kW and below.
445.16 Bushings. Where wires passfield-installed wiring
passes through an opening in an enclosure, a conduit box, or
a barrier, a bushing shall be used to protect the conduc- tors
from the edges of an opening having sharp edges. The
bushing shall have smooth, well-rounded surfaces where it
may be in contact with the conductors. If used where oils,
grease, or other contaminants may be present, the bushing
shall be made of a material not deleteriously affected.
Change Description:
Revised for better clarity.
445.17 Generator Terminal Housings. Generator terminal housings shall comply with 430.12. Where a horsepower rating is required to determine the required minimum size of the generator terminal housing, the full-load
current of the generator shall be compared with comparable
motors in Table 430.247 through Table 430.250. The higher
horsepower rating of Table 430.247 and Table 430.250
shall be used whenever the generator selection is between
two ratings.
Exception: This section shall not apply to generators
rated over 600 volts.
Change Description:
Table 430.12 only applies to generators rated less than 600 volts.
The sizes shown are too small for 15 kV conductors. See Article
430 Part XI for over 600 volts.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 70 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
445.18 Disconnecting Means Required for Generators.
Generators shall be equipped with a disconnect(s), lockable in
the open position by means of which the generator and all
protective devices and control apparatus are able to be
disconnected entirely from the circuits supplied by the generator except where both of the following conditions apply:
(1) The driving means for the generator can be readily shut
down.Portable generators are cord- and plug- connected,
or
(2) Both of the following conditions apply:
a. The driving means for the generator can be readily
shut down, is rendered incapable of restarting, and is
lockable in the OFF position in accordance with
110.25.
(2)b. The generator is not arranged to operate in parallel
with another generator or other source of voltage.
Change Description:
This change is partially based on the requirements found in UL
2200 which mandates a means to stop the driving means,
prevent restarting, and requires the means to be lockable in OFF
position.
445.19 Generators Supplying Multiple Loads. A single
generator supplying more than one load, or multiple generators operating in parallel, shall be permitted to supply
either of the following:
(1) A vertical switchboard with separate sections
(2) Individual enclosures with overcurrent protection
tapped from a single feeder for load separation and
distribution if a generator(s) is provided with overcur- rent
protection meeting the requirements of 240.15(A).
Change Description:
This section has been deleted recognizing because the Article
covering generators should not place restrictions on, or otherwise
address, what a generator can supply.
445.20 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Protection for
Receptacles on 15-kW or Smaller Portable Generators.
All 125-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacle
outlets that are a part of a 15-kW or smaller portable generator either shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel integral to the generator or receptacle
or shall not be available for use when the 125/250-volt
locking-type receptacle is in use. If the generator was
manufactured or remanufactured prior to January 1,
2015, listed cord sets or devices incorporating listed
Change Description:
This new section adds a requirement for GFCI protection for 15and 20-ampere receptacles mounted on portable generators,
rated 15 kW or less, used frequently in camping, construction,
and loss of power situations). This addition provides better
protection to personnel utilizing portable equipment fed from such
a generator.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 71 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel
identified for portable use shall be permitted. If the
generator does not have a 125/250-volt locking-type
receptacle, this requirement shall not apply.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 450
Transformers and Transformer Vaults (including Secondary Ties)
450.5 Grounding Autotransformers. Grounding auChange Description:
totransformers covered in this section are zigzag or
Added new exception which allows the use of a special grounding
T-connected transformers connected to 3-phase, 3-wire unautotransformer which does not permit neutral or ground-fault
grounded systems for the purpose of creating a 3-phase,
current to return over the line connection to be installed on the
4-wire distribution system or providing a neutral point for
load side of the system grounding connection. This change
grounding purposes. Such transformers shall have a conallows the use of a device which provides equally safe installation
tinuous per-phase current rating and a continuous neutral
current rating. Zigzag-connected transformers shall not be
but is less expensive, smaller, and more energy efficient.
installed on the load side of any system grounding connection, including those made in accordance with 250.24(B),
250.30(A)(1), or 250.32(B), Exception No. 1.
Exception: An auto transformer with a wye configuration
on its line side and a zigzag configuration on its load side
that does not permit neutral or ground-fault current to return over the line connection shall be permitted on the load
side of a system grounding connection. This exception shall
not apply to a connection made from a high-resistance
grounded system applied in accordance with 250.36
450.10 Grounding.
(A) Dry-Type Transformer Enclosures. Where separate
equipment grounding conductors and supply-side bonding
jumpers are installed, a terminal bar for all grounding and
bonding conductor connections shall be secured inside the
transformer enclosure. The terminal bar shall be bonded to
the enclosure in accordance with 250.12 and shall not be
installed on or over any vented portion of the enclosure.
Exception: Where a dry-type transformer is equipped with
wire-type connections (leads), the grounding and bonding
connections shall be permitted to be connected together
using any of the methods in 250.8 and shall be bonded to
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This new subsection eliminates a common practice of connecting
grounding and bonding conductors at or over the venting
openings resulting in less effective connection. The requirement
for a terminal bar eliminates inconsistencies in installation and
provides more effective connection.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
Page 72 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
the enclosure if of metal.
(B) Other Metal Parts. Where grounded, exposed non–
current-carrying metal parts of transformer installations, including fences, guards, and so forth, shall be grounded and
bonded under the conditions and in the manner specified
for electrical equipment and other exposed metal parts in
Parts V, VI, and VII of Article 250.
450.11 Marking.
(B) Source Marking. A transformer shall be permitted to
be supplied at the marked secondary voltage, provided that
the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Change Description:
This added subsection clarifies that connecting a transformer in
reverse (i.e., supply connected to the secondary winding) is only
allowed if in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
480.3 Battery and Cell Terminations.
(A) Dissimilar Metals. Where mating dissimilar metals,
antioxidant material suitable for the battery connection
shall be used.
(B) Intercell and Intertier Conductors and Connections. The ampacity of field-assembled intercell and intertier connectors and conductors shall be of such crosssectional area that the temperature rise under maximum
load conditions and at maximum ambient temperature shall
not exceed the safe operating temperature of the conductor
insulation or of the material of the conductor supports.
(C) Battery Terminals. Electrical connections to the battery, and the cable(s) between cells on separate levels or
racks, shall not put mechanical strain on the battery terminals. Terminal plates shall be used where practicable.
480.6 DC Disconnect Methods.
(B) Remote Actuation. Where controls to activate the disconnecting means of a battery are not located within sight
of a stationary battery system, the disconnecting means
ARTICLE 480
Storage Batteries
Change Description:
New Section provides requirements for antioxidant material used
on battery terminals, correlates this section with Section
668.12(B), and addresses strain put on terminals by weight of
cables.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
New subsections address requirements for remotely actuated DC
disconnecting means, disconnect incorporated into a busway,
Page 73 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
shall be capable of being locked in the open position, in
accordance with 110.25, and the location of the controls
shall be field marked on the disconnecting means.
(C) Busway. Where a DC busway system is installed, the
disconnecting means shall be permitted to be incorporated
into the busway.
and marking of the disconnecting means.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(D) Notification. The disconnecting means shall be legibly
marked in the field. A label with the marking shall be
placed in a conspicuous location near the battery if a disconnecting means is not provided. The marking shall be of
sufficient durability to withstand the environment involved
and shall include the following:
(1) Nominal battery voltage
(2) Maximum available short-circuit current derived from
the stationary battery system
(3) Date the calculation was performed
480.7 Insulation of Batteries of over 250 Volts. The provisions of 480.6 shall apply to storage batteries having the
cells connected so as to operate at a nominal voltage exceeding 250 volts, and, in addition, the provisions of this
section shall also apply to such batteries. Cells shall be
installed in groups having a total nominal voltage of not
over 250 volts. Insulation, which can be air, shall be provided between groups and shall have a minimum separation
between live battery parts of opposite polarity of 50 mm
(2 in.) for battery voltages not exceeding 600 volts.
Change Description:
This section was deleted due to its lack of clarity. In addition, it
did not improve safety but was reducing the reliability of the
battery systems.
480.8 Racks and Trays.
(C) Accessibility. The terminals of all cells or multi-cell
units shall be readily accessible for readings, inspection,
and cleaning where required by the equipment design. One
side of transparent battery containers shall be readily accessible for inspection of the internal components.
Change Description:
Added definition clarifies expectations regarding accessibility of
battery racks and trays for inspections.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 74 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
480.9 Battery Locations. Battery locations shall conform
to 480.9(A), (B), and (C).
(A) Ventilation. Provisions appropriate to the battery technology shall be made for sufficient diffusion and ventilation
of the gases from the battery, if present, to prevent the
accumulation of an explosive mixture.
(C) Working Space.Spaces About Battery Systems.
Working space Spaces about the battery systems shall
comply with 110.26. Working clearancespace shall be
measured from the edge of the batteryrack cabinet, racks,
or trays.
For battery racks, there shall be a minimum clearance
of 25 mm (1 in.) between a cell container and any wall or
structure on the side not requiring access for maintenance.
Battery stands shall be permitted to contact adjacent walls
or structures, provided that the battery shelf has a free air
space for not less than 90 percent of its length.
Change Description:
This added language covers installation aspects which were
originally addressed in NFPA 70E and deleted in 2009 edition of
that code. This change was developed as a joint effort of the NEC
DC Task Force and IEEE Stationary Battery Code Working
Group.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – improves safety.
Informational Note:
Additional space is often
needed to accommodate battery hoisting equipment,
tray removal, or spill containment.
(D) Top Terminal Batteries. Where top terminal
batteries are installed on tiered racks, working space in
accordance with
the
battery
manufacturer’s
instructions shall be pro- vided between the highest
point on a cell and the row or ceiling above that
point.
Informational Note: Battery manufacturer’s installation
in- structions typically define how much top working
space is necessary for a particular battery model.
(E) Egress. A personnel door(s) intended for entrance
to, and egress from, rooms designated as battery rooms
shall open in the direction of egress and shall be
equipped with listed panic hardware.
(F) Piping in Battery Rooms. Gas piping shall not be
Page 75 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
permitted in dedicated battery rooms.
(G) Illumination. Illumination shall be provided for
work- ing spaces containing battery systems. The
lighting outlets shall not be controlled by automatic
means only. Additional lighting outlets shall not be
required where the work space is illuminated by an
adjacent light source. The location of luminaires shall
not:
(1) Expose
personnel
to
energized
battery
components while performing maintenance on the
luminaires in the battery space; or
(2) Create a hazard to the battery upon failure of the
luminaire.
ARTICLE 490
Equipment Over 6001000 Volts, Nominal
490.21 Circuit-Interrupting Devices.
Change Description:
(B) Power Fuses and Fuseholders.
Change associated with deletion of Section 225.70(A). Added
(6) Fuseholders. Fuseholders shall be designed or inrequirement for a field label alerting the worker to the danger
stalled so that they are de-energized while a fuse is being
associated with replacing fuses.
replaced. A field-applied permanent and legible sign, in accordance with 110.21(B), shall be installed immediately adjacent to the fuseholders and shall be worded as follows:
DANGER — DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BEFORE REPLACING FUSES.
Exception: Fuses and fuseholders designed to permit fuse
replacement by qualified persons using equipment designed
for the purposeidentified equipment without de-energizing
the fuseholder shall be permitted.
490.25 Backfeed. Installations where the possibility of
backfeed exists shall comply with (a) and (b), which follow.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – improves safety.
Change Description:
Modified the requirement originally provided in Section
225.70(A)(4) which was deleted in this edition of the code.
(a) A permanent sign in accordance with 110.21(B)
Page 76 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
shall be installed on the disconnecting means enclosure or
immediately adjacent to open disconnecting means with the
following words or equivalent: DANGER — CONTACTS
ON EITHER SIDE OF THIS DEVICE MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED.
(b) A permanent and legible single-line diagram of the
local switching arrangement, clearly identifying each point
of connection to the high-voltage section, shall be provided
within sight of each point of connection.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
490.35 Accessibility of Energized Parts.
(A) High-Voltage Equipment. Doors that would provide
unqualified persons access to high-voltage energized parts
shall be locked. Permanent signs in accordance with
110.21(B) shall be installed on panels or doors that provide
access to live parts over 1000 volts and shall read DANGER — HIGH VOLTAGE — KEEP OUT
Change Description:
Added the requirement originally provided in Section 225.70(A)(5)
which was deleted in this edition of the code.
490.47 Metal-Enclosed
and
Metal-CladSwitchgear
Used as Service Equipment. Metal-enclosed and metalclad switchgear Switchgear installed as high-voltage service equipment shall include a ground bus for the connection of service cable shields and to facilitate the attachment
of safety grounds for personnel protection. This bus shall
be extended into the compartment where the service conductors are terminated. Where the compartment door or
panel provides access to parts that can only be de-energized
and visibly isolated by the serving utility, the warning sign
required by 490.35(A) shall include a notice that access is
limited to the serving utility or is permitted only following
an authorization of the serving utility.
490.48 Substation Design, Documentation, and Required Diagram.
(A) Design and Documentation. Substations shall be designed by a qualified licensed professional engineer. Where
components or the entirety of the substation are listed by a
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added and expanded the requirement originally provided in
Section 225.70(A)(5) which was deleted in this edition of the
code.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added and made editorial changes to the requirement originally
provided in Section 225.70(A)(5) which was deleted in this edition
of the code.
Page 77 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
qualified electrical testing laboratory, documentation of internal design features subject to the listing investigation
shall not be required. The design shall address but not be
limited to the following topics and the documentation of
this design shall be made available to the authority having
jurisdiction.
(1) Clearances and exits
(2) Electrical enclosures
(3) Securing and support of electrical equipment
(4) Fire protection
(5) Safety ground connection provisions
(6) Guarding live parts
(7) Transformers and voltage regulation equipment
(8) Conductor insulation, electrical and mechanical protection, isolation, and terminations
(9) Application, arrangement, and disconnection of circuit
breakers, switches, and fuses
(10) Provisions for oil filled equipment
(11) Switchgear
(12) Surge arrestors
(B) Diagram. A permanent, single-line diagram of the
switchgear shall be provided in a readily visible location
within the same room or enclosed area with the switchgear,
and this diagram shall clearly identify interlocks, isolation
means, and all possible sources of voltage to the installation
under normal or emergency conditions, and the marking on
the switchgear shall cross-reference the diagram.
Exception: Where the equipment consists solely of a single
cubicle or metal-enclosed unit substation containing only
one set of high-voltage switching devices, diagrams shall
not be required.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 500
Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Division 1 and 2
500.2 Definitions.
Change Description:
Combustible Dust. Any finely divided solid material that
Revised to align with the changed definition found in NFPA 499.
is 420 microns (0.017 in.) or smaller in diameter (material
Page 78 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
passing a U.S. No. 40 Standard Sieve) and presents a fire or
explosion hazard when dispersed and ignited in air. [499,
2008]
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Combustible Dust. Dust particles that are 500 microns or
smaller (material passing a U.S. No. 35 Standard Sieve as
defined in ASTM E 11-09, Standard Specification for Wire
Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes) and present a fire or
explosion hazard when dispersed and ignited in air.
500.5 Classifications of Locations.
(A) Classifications of Locations. Locations shall be classified depending on the properties of the flammable gas,
flammable liquid-–produced vapor, combustible liquid–
produced vapors, combustible dusts, or fibers/flyings that
may be present, and the likelihood that a flammable or
combustible concentration or quantity is present. Each
room, section, or area shall be considered individually in
determining its classification. Where pyrophoric materials
are the only materials used or handled, these locations shall
not be classified. Each room, section, or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification.are
outside the scope of this article.
500.8 Equipment. Articles 500 through 504 require equipment construction and installation that ensure safe performance under conditions of proper use and maintenance.
(C) Marking. Equipment shall be marked to show the environment for which it has been evaluated. Unless otherwise specified or allowed in (C)(6), the marking shall include the information specified in (C)(1) through (C)(5).
(4) Equipment Temperature. The marking shall specify
the temperature class or operating temperature at a 40°C
ambient temperature, or at the higher ambient temperature
if the equipment is rated and marked for an ambient temperature of greater than 40°C. For equipment installed in a
Class II, Division 1 location, the temperature class or operating temperature shall be based on operation of the equip-
Change Description:
Clarified the original intent of this section.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Clarified the requirements for defining temperature class as
referring to operating temperature when blanketed with dust.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 79 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ment when blanketed with the maximum amount of dust
that can accumulate on the equipment. The temperature
class, if provided, shall be indicated using the temperature
class (T Codes)codes) shown in Table 500.8(C). Equipment
for Class I and Class II shall be marked with the maximum
safe operating temperature, as determined by simultaneous exposure to the combinations of Class I and Class II conditions.
501.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
with 501.10(A) or (B).
(A) Class I, Division 1.
(1) General. In Class I, Division 1 locations, the wiring
methods in (a) through (d)(e) shall be permitted.
e) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR,
OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted
to be installed in raceways in accordance with 501.10(A).
These optical fiber cables shall be sealed in accordance
with 501.15.
(2) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ
flexible connections, as at motor terminals, the following
shall be permitted:
(1) fFlexible fittings listed for the location, or
(2) fFlexible cord in accordance with the provisions of
501.140, terminated with cord connectors listed for the
location, shall be permitted. or
ARTICLE 501
Class I Locations
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements.
In addition, the new subsection adds TC-ER-HL cable as an
acceptable wiring method for industrial applications where
flexibility is required. This cable is approved for use in classified
locations per UL 2225.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(3) In industrial establishments with restricted public access, where the conditions of maintenance and supervision
ensure that only qualified persons service the installation,
for applications limited to 600 volts, nominal, or less,
and where protected from damage by location or a suitable
guard, listed Type TC-ER-HL cable with an overall jacket
and a separate equipment grounding conductor(s) in
accordance with 250.122 that is terminated with fittings
listed for the location
Page 80 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
501.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
with 501.10(A) or (B).
(B) Class I, Division 2.
(1) General. In Class I, Division 2 locations, the following
wiring methods shall be permitted:
(7) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,
OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted to be
installed in cable trays or any other raceway in accor- dance
with 501.10(B). Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in
accordance with 501.15.
(2) Flexible Connections. Where provision must be made
for limited flexibility, one or more of the following shall be
permitted:
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements. The added subsection 501.10(B)(2)(3)
adds to the acceptable wiring methods the MC cable already
listed in 510.(A)(1). Also, the change under subsection
501.10(B)(2)(7) correlates the requirements with Chapter 4.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(3) Interlocked armor Type MC cable with listed fittings.
(7) For elevator use, an identified elevator cable of Type
EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the “use” column in
Table 400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations” and
terminated with listed fittings.
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(A) Conduit Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, conduit seals shall be located in accordance with 501.15(A)(1) through (A)(4).
(1) Entering Enclosures. In each Each conduit entry
into an explosionproof enclosure shall have a conduit
seal where either of the following apply: conditions
applies:
(1) The enclosure contains apparatus, such as switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays, or resistors, that may pro-duce
arcs, sparks, or high temperatures that are considered to be
an ignition sourceexceed 80 percent of the autoignition
Change Description:
Revised to clarify language and for consistency with the NEC
Style Manual.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 81 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the gas or vapor
involved in normal operation.
Exception: Seals shall not be required for conduit entering
an enclosure under any one of the following conditions:
a. The switch, circuit breaker, fuse, relay, or resistor is
enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed against
the entrance of gases or vapors.
b. The switch, circuit breaker, fuse, relay, or resistor is
immersed in oil in accordance with 501.115(B)(1)(2).
c. The switch, circuit breaker, fuse, relay, or resistor is
enclosed within a factory-sealed explosionproof chamber located within the enclosure, identified for the location, and marked “factory sealed” or equivalent.
d. The switch, circuit breaker, fuse, relay, or resistor is
part of a nonincendive circuit.
(2) The entry is metric designator 53 (trade size 2) or
larger, and the enclosure contains terminals, splices, or
taps.
For the purposes of this section, high temperatures shall
be considered to be any temperatures exceeding 80 percent
of the autoignition temperature in degrees Celsius of the
gas or vapor involved.
Exception to 501.15(A)(1)(1): Seals shall not be required
for conduit entering an enclosure where such switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays, or resistors comply with one of
the following:
(1) Are enclosed within a chamber hermetically sealed
against the entrance of gases or vapors
(2) Are immersed in oil in accordance with
501.115(B)(1)(2)
(3) Are enclosed within a factory-sealed explosionproof
chamber located within the enclosure, identified for the
ocation, and marked “factory sealed” or equivalent,
unless the enclosure entry is metric designator 53
Page 82 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(trade size 2) or larger
(4) Are in nonincendive circuits
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(A) Conduit Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1 locations, conduit seals shall be located in accordance with 501.15(A)(1) through (A)(4).
4) Class I, Division 1 Boundary. In A conduit seal shall
be required in each conduit run leaving a Class I, Division
1 location. The sealing fitting shall be permitted to be installed on either side of the boundary and it shall be
dewithin 3.05 m (10 ft) of the boundary, and it shall be designed and installed so as to minimize the amount of gas or
vapor within the Division 1 portion of the conduit from
being communicated to the conduit installed in the Division1
location that can be communicated beyond the seal. Except for listed explosionproof reducers The conduit run between the conduit seal and the point at which at the conduit
seal, there leaves the Division 1 location shall becontain no
union, coupling, box, or other fitting between the conduit
seal and the pointexcept for a listed explosionproof reducer
installed at which the conduit leaves the Division 1 location.seal.
Change Description:
Revised to clarify language and for consistency with the NEC
Style Manual.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
Change Description:
Revised to clarify language and for consistency with the NEC
Style Manual.
1
(B) Conduit Seals, Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations, conduit seals shall be located in accordance with 501.15(B)(1) and (B)(2).
(2) Class I, Division 2 Boundary. In A conduit seal shall
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 83 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
be required in each conduit run passing from leaving a
Class I, Division 2 location into an unclassified location.
The sealing fitting shall be permitted to be installed on
either side of the boundary of such location within 3.05 m
(10 ft) of the boundary and it shall be designed and installed to minimize the amount of gas or vapor within the
portion of the conduit installed in the Division 2 location
that can be communicated beyond the seal. Rigid metal
conduit or threaded steel intermediate metal conduit shall
be used between the sealing fitting and the point at which
the conduit leaves the Division 2 location, and a threaded
connection shall be used at the sealing fitting. Except for
listed reducers at the conduit seal, there shall be no union,
coupling, box, or fitting The conduit run between the conduit seal and the point at which the conduit leaves the
Division 2 location. Conduits shall be sealed to minimize
the amount of gas or vapor within the Division 2 portion of
the conduit from being communicated to location shall contain no union, coupling, box, or other fitting except for a
listed explosionproof reducer installed at the conduit beyond the seal. Such seals shall not be required to be explosionproof but shall be identified for the purpose of minimizing the passage of gases permitted under normal
operating conditions and shall be accessible.
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(D) Cable Seals, Class I, Division 1. In Class I, Division 1
locations, cable seals shall be located according to
501.15(D)(1) through (D)(3).
2) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors.
Cables in conduit with a gas/vaportight continuous sheath
capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable
core, installed in conduit, shall be sealed in the Class 1,
Division 1 location after removing the jacket and any other
coverings have been removed so that the sealing compound
Change Description:
Revised to clarify language and for consistency with the NEC
Style Manual.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 84 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
willcan surround each individual insulated conductor or optical fiber tube and the outer jacket.
Exception: Multiconductor cables with a gas/vaportight
continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors
through the cable core shall be permitted to be considered
as a single conductor by sealing the cable in the conduit
within 450 mm (18 in.) of the enclosure and the cable end
within the enclosure by an approved means to minimize the
entrance of gases or vapors and prevent the propagation of
flame into the cable core, or by other approved methods.
For shielded cables and twisted pair cables, it It shall not
be required to remove the shielding material or separate
the twisted pairs of shielded cables and twisted pair cables.
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
Change Description:
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
Revised to clarify language and for consistency with the NEC
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fitStyle Manual. Also, added an exception allowing cables with
tings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
unbroken gas/vaportight continuous sheath to pass through Div.
insulation.
(E) Cable Seals, Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 2 location without seals and expanded to include seals of fiber
optic cables.
locations, cable seals shall be located in accordance with
501.15(E)(1) through (E)(4).
Exception: Cables with an unbroken gas/vaportight conImpact(s) :
tinuous sheath shall be permitted to pass through a DiviNo negative impact.
sion 2 location without seals.
(1) Terminations. Cables entering enclosures that are required to be explosionproof shall be sealed at the point of
entrance. The sealing fitting shall comply with
01.15(B)(1) or be explosionproof. Multiconductor or optical multifiber cables with a gas/vaportight continuous
sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the
cable core shall be sealedthat are installed in a listed fitting
in the Division 2 location after removing Division 2 location shall be sealed with a listed fitting after the jacket and
any other coverings have been removed so that the sealing
compound can surrounds each individual insulated conductor or optical fiber tube in such a manner as to minimize the
passage of gases and vapors. Multiconductor or optical
Page 85 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
multifiber cables installed in conduit shall be sealed as described in 501.15(D).
2) Cables That Do Not Transmit Gases or Vapors.
Cables that have a gas/vaportight continuous sheath and do
not transmit gases or vapors through the cable core in excess of the quantity permitted for seal fittings shall not be
required to be sealed except as required in 501.15(E)(1).
The minimum length of such a cable run shall not be less
than thatthe length that limits needed to limit gas or vapor
flow through the cable core, excluding the interstices of the
conductor strands, to the rate permitted for seal fittings
[200 cm3/hr (0.007 ft3/hr) of air at a pressure of 1500 pascals (6 in. of water)].
501.15 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 501.15(A) through (F). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(F) Drainage.
(2) Motors and Generators. Where the authority having
jurisdiction judges that there is a probability that liquid or
condensed vapor may accumulate within motors or generators, joints and conduit systems shall be arranged to minimize the entrance of liquid. If means to prevent accumulation or to permit periodic draining are judged necessary,
such means shall be provided at the time of manufacture
and shall be considered an integral part of the machine.
Change Description:
This change removed ambiguity of the language in this section.
501.17 Process Sealing. This section shall apply to
process-connected equipment, which includes, but is not
limited to, canned pumps, submersible pumps, flow, pressure, temperature, or analysis measurement instruments. A
process seal is a device to prevent the migration of process
fluids from the designed containment into the external electrical system. Process-connected electrical equipment that
incorporates a single process seal, such as a single compression seal, diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or
Change Description:
This change correlates the requirements with ANSI/ISA-12.27.01.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact – improves safety.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 86 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
combustible fluids from entering a conduit or cable system
capable of transmitting fluids, shall be provided with an
additional means to mitigate a single process seal failure,
The additional means may include, but is not limited to, the
following:
(4) An add-on secondary seal marked “secondary seal” and
rated for the pressure and temperature conditions to which
it will be subjected upon failure of the single process seal.
501.30 Grounding and Bonding, Class I, Divisions 1
and 2. Wiring Regardless of the voltage of the electrical
system, wiring and equipment in Class I, Division 1 and 2
locations shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 and
in accordance with the requirements of 501.30(A) and (B).
Change Description:
This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
501.40 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class I, Division
1 location, a multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
Change Description:
The requirements found in this deleted section are already
included in 210.4(B) and do not need to be repeated here.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit
opens all ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit
simultaneously.
501.105 Meters, Instruments, and Relays.
(B) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations,
meters, instruments, and relays shall comply with
501.105(B)(1) through (B)(6).
(6) Connections. To facilitate replacements, process control instruments shall be permitted to be connected through
flexible cord, attachment plug, and receptacle, provided all of
the following conditions apply:
(1) A switch complying with 501.105(B)(1) is provided so
that the attachment plug is not depended on to interrupt
current.
Exception: The switch is not required if the circuit is nonincendive field wiring.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The added exception eliminates the requirement for a switch in a
circuit with a connection plug for nonincendive field wiring.
Nonincendive wiring is not capable of igniting flammable mixtures
and a switch in this case is not required.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 87 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
501.130 Luminaires. Luminaires shall comply with
501.130(A) or (B).
(B) Class I, Division 2. In Class I, Division 2 locations,
luminaires shall comply with 501.130(B)(1) through (B)(6).
(4) Portable Lighting Equipment. Portable lighting
equipment shall comply with 501.130(A)(1).
Exception: Where portable lighting equipment is mounted
on movable stands and is connected by flexible cords, as
covered in 501.140, it shall be permitted to comply with
501.130(B)(1), where mounted in any position, if provided
that it conforms to also complies with 501.130(B)(2).
501.140 Flexible Cords, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. (A)
Permitted Uses. Flexible cord shall be permitted:
(1) For connection between portable lighting equipment or
other portable utilization equipment and the fixed portion
of their supply circuit. The flexible cord shall be attached
to the utilization equipment with a cord connector listed for
the protection technique of the equipment wiring
compartment. An attachment plug in accordance with
501.140(B)(4) shall be employed.
501.145 Receptacles and Attachment Plugs, Class I, Divisions 1 and 2. Receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of
the type providing for connection to the equipment grounding
conductor of a flexible cord and shall be identi- fied for the
location.
(A) Receptacles. Receptacles shall be part of the premises
wiring, except as permitted by 501.140(A).
(B) Attachment Plugs. Attachment plugs shall be of the
type providing for connection to the equipment grounding
conductor of a flexible cord and shall be identified for the
location.
Change Description:
The change clarifies the language of this exception.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Revised to make clear that 501.140(A)(1) covers power cords
that attach to the utilization equipment with a cord connector and
have an attachment plug for connection to premises wiring.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Revised to make clear that the receptacle is part of the premises
wiring and that the attachment plug is part of the utilization
equipment.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 502
Page 88 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Class II Locations
502.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
Change Description:
with 502.10(A) or (B).
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
(A) Class II, Division 1.
(1) General. In Class II, Division 1 locations, the wiring Chapter 5 requirements.
methods in (1) through (4) shall be permitted:
Also, the change under subsection 502.10(A)(1)(6) correlates the
(4) Fittings and boxes shall be provided with threaded
requirements with Chapter 4.
bosses for connection to conduit or cable terminations
and shall be dusttight. Fittings and boxes in which taps,
joints, or terminal connections are made, or that are
used in Group E locations, shall be identified for
Class II locations.
(4) Optical fiber cables Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR,
OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted to be installed in raceways in accordance with
502.10(A). Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in
accordance with 502.15.
6) For elevator use, an identified elevator cable of Type
EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the “use” column in
Table 400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations” and
terminated with listed dusttight fittings.
502.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
with 502.10(A) or (B).
(A) Class II, Division 1.
(3) Boxes and Fittings. Boxes and fittings shall be provided with threaded bosses for connection to conduit or
cable terminations and shall be dusttight. Boxes and fittings
in which taps, joints, or terminal connections are made, or
that are used in Group E locations, shall be identified for
Class II locations.
502.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
with 502.10(A) or (B).
(B) Class II, Division 2.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Editorial change – relocated from 502.10(A)(1)(4).
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Page 89 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(1) General. In Class II, Division 2 locations, the following wiring methods shall be permitted:
(6) Type MC, MI, or TC cable installed in ladder, ventilated trough, or ventilated channel cable trays in a
single layer, with a space not less than the larger cable
diameter between the two adjacent cables, shall be the
wiring method employed.
Exception to (6): Type MC cable listed for use in Class II,
Division 1 locations shall be permitted to be installed without the spacings required by (6).
8) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,
OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted to be
installed in cable trays or any other raceway in accordance with 502.10(B). Optical fiber cables shall be
sealed in accordance with 502.15.
Chapter 5 requirements.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception to (6): Type MC cable listed for use in Class II,
Division 1 locations shall be permitted to be installed without the spacings required by (6).
502.30 Grounding and Bonding, Class II, Divisions 1
and 2. Wiring Regardless of the voltage of the electrical
system, wiring and equipment in Class II, Division 1 and 2
locations shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 and in
accordance with the requirements of 502.30(A) and (B).
Change Description:
This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
502.40 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class II, Division
1 location, a multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
Change Description:
The requirements found in this deleted section are already
included in 210.4(B) and do not need to be repeated here.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit
opens all ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit
simultaneously.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
502.125 Motors and Generators.
(A) Class II, Division 1. In Class II, Division 1 locations,
motors, generators, and other rotating electrical machinery
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Editorial change.
Page 90 of 203
1
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
shall be in conformance with either of the following:
(1) Identified for the location
(2) Totally enclosed pipe-ventilated, meeting temperature
limitations in 502.5pipe-ventilated
502.140 Flexible Cords — Class II, Divisions 1 and 2.
(A) Permitted Uses. Flexible cords used in Class II locations shall comply with all of the following:
(1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage For connection
between portable lighting equipment or other portable
utilization equipment and the fixed portion of its supply
circuit. The flexible cord shall be attached to the utilization equipment with a cord connector listed for the
protection technique of the equipment wiring compartment. An attachment plug in accordance with 502.145
shall be employed.
(2) Where flexible cord is permitted by 502.10(A)(2) for
fixed and mobile electrical utilization equipment;
where the flexible cord is protected by location or by a
suitable guard from damage; and only in an industrial
establishment where conditions of maintenance and engineering supervision ensure that only qualified persons
install and service the installation.
(3) For electric submersible pumps with means for removal without entering the wet-pit. The extension of
the flexible cord within a suitable raceway between the
wet-pit and the power source shall be permitted.
(4) For electric mixers intended for travel into and out of
open-type mixing tanks or vats.
(5) For temporary portable assemblies consisting of receptacles, switches, and other devices that are not considered portable utilization equipment but are individually
listed for the location.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Revised to make clear that 502.140(A) covers power cords that
attach to the utilization equipment with a cord connector and have
an attachment plug for connection to premises wiring. It mirrors
changes to Section 501.140.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Installation. Where flexible cords are used, the cords
shall comply with all of the following:
(1) Be of a type listed for extra-hard usage.
Page 91 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
5) Be of continuous length. Where 502.140(A)(5) is applied, cords shall be of continuous length from the
power source to the temporary portable assembly and
from the temporary portable assembly to the utilization
equipment.
502.145 Receptacles and Attachment Plugs. Receptacles
and attachment plugs shall be identified for the location.
(A) Class II, Division 1.
(1) Receptacles. In Class II, Division 1 locations, receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of the type providing
for connection to the equipment grounding conductor of the
flexible cord and shall be identified for Class II locations.
part of the premises wiring.
(2) Attachment Plugs. Attachment plugs shall be of the
type that provides for connection to the equipment grounding conductor of the flexible cord.
(B) Class II, Division 2.
(1) Receptacles. In Class II, Division 2 locations, receptacles and attachment plugs shall be of the type that provides for connection to the equipment grounding conductor
of the flexible cord and shall be designed so that connection
to the supply circuit cannot be made or broken while live
parts are exposed.part of the premises wiring.
Change Description:
Revised to make clear that the receptacle is part of the premises
wiring and that the attachment plug is part of the utilization
equipment.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Attachment Plugs. Attachment plugs shall be of the
type that provides for connection to the equipment grounding conductor of the flexible cord.
503.5 General. Equipment installed in Class III locations
shall be able to function at full rating without developing
surface temperatures high enough to cause excessive dehydration or gradual carbonization of accumulated
fibers/flyings. Organic material that is carbonized or exces-
ARTICLE 503
Class III Locations
Change Description:
Clarified the requirements for defining temperature class as
referring to operating temperature when blanketed with dust
(simulating fibers/flyings).
Page 92 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
sively dry is highly susceptible to spontaneous ignition.
The maximum surface temperatures under operating conditions shall not exceed 165°C (329°F) for equipment that is
not subject to overloading, and 120°C (248°F) for equipment (such as motors or power transformers) that may be
overloaded. In a Class III, Division 1 location, the operating temperature shall be the temperature of the equipment
when blanketed with the maximum amount of dust (simulating fibers/flyings) that can accumulate on the equipment.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
503.10 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall comply
with 503.10(A) or (B).
(A) Class III,
Division 1.
Change Description:
The change under subsection 503.10(A)(3)(6) correlates the
requirements with Chapter 4.
(1) General. In Class III, Division 1 locations, the wiring
method shall be in accordance with (1) through (4):
(4) Type MC, MI, TC, or TC-ER cable installed in ladder,
ventilated trough, or ventilated channel cable trays in
a single layer, with a space not less than the larger
cable diameter between the two adjacent cables, shall
be the wiring method employed. The cable shall be
terminated with listed fittings.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
(3) Flexible Connections. Where necessary to employ
flexible connections, one or more of the following shall be
permitted:
(6) For elevator use, an identified elevator cable of Type
EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the “use” column in
Table 400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations”
and terminated with listed dusttight fittings.
503.30 Grounding and Bonding — Class III, Divisions
1 and 2. Wiring Regardless of the voltage of the electrical
system, wiring and equipment in Class III, Division 1 and 2
locations shall be grounded as specified in Article 250 and
with the following additional requirements in 503.30(A)
and (B).
Change Description:
This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 93 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ARTICLE 504
Intrinsically Safe Systems
504.30 Separation of Intrinsically Safe Conductors.
Change Description:
(A) From Nonintrinsically Safe Circuit Conductors.
Expanded separation requirement between nonintrinsically safe
(2) Within Enclosures. Conductors of intrinsically safe and intrinsically safe circuits to include specific dimensions for the
circuits shall be secured so that any conductor that might
partition.
come loose from a terminal is unlikely to come into contact
2
with another terminal. The conductors shall be separated from
conductors of nonintrinsically safe circuits by one of the Impact(s) :
methods in (1) through (4).
No negative impact.
(3) Separation from conductors of nonintrinsically safe circuits by use of an approved insulating partition. that
extends to within 1.5 mm (0.0625 in.) of the enclosure
walls
C) From Grounded Metal. The clearance between the
uninsulated parts of field wiring conductors connected to
terminals and grounded metal or other conducting parts
shall be at least 3 mm (0.125 in.).
505.5 Classifications of Locations.
(A) Classification of Locations. Locations shall be classified depending on the properties of the flammable vapors,
liquids, or gases flammable gases, flammable liquid–
produced vapors, combustible liquid–produced vapors,
combustible dusts, or fibers/flyings that may be present and
the likelihood that a flammable or combustible concentration or quantity is present. Each room, section, or area shall
be considered individually in determining its classification.
Where pyrophoric materials are the only materials used or
handled, these locations shall not be classified. Each room,
ARTICLE 505
Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations
Change Description:
Clarified the original intent of this section.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 94 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
section, or area shall be considered individually in determining its classification.are outside the scope of this article.
505.6 Material Groups. For purposes of testing, approval,
and area classification, various air mixtures (not oxygen
enriched) shall be grouped as required in 505.6(A), (B), and
(C).
Group II shall be subdivided into IIC, IIB, and IIA, as
noted in 505.6(A), (B), and (C), according to the nature of
the gas or vapor, for protection techniques “d,” “ia,” “ib,”
“[ia],” and “[ib],” and, where applicable, “n” and “o.”
Change Description:
The second paragraph was redundant and was deleted from this
section.
505.7 Special Precaution. Article 505 requires equipment
construction and installation that ensures safe performance
under conditions of proper use and maintenance.
(F) Available Short-Circuit Current for Type of Protection “e”. The available short-circuit current for electrical
equipment using type of protection “e” for the field wiring
connections in Zone 1 locations shall be limited to 10,000
rms symmetrical amperes to reduce the likelihood of ignition of a flammable atmosphere by an arc during a shortcircuit event.
Change Description:
Added short circuit current requirements to correlate this
subsection with ANSI/UL 508A, Standard for Industrial Control
Panels.
505.9 Equipment.
(C) Marking. Equipment shall be marked in accordance
with 505.9(C)(1) or (C)(2).
(2) Zone Equipment. Equipment meeting one or more of
the protection techniques described in 505.8 shall be
marked with all of the following in the order shown:
(5) Applicable gas classification group(s) material group in
accordance with Table 505.9(C)(1)(2) or a specific gas
or vapor
Exception No. 3: Fittings for the termination of cables
shall not be required to have a marked operating temperature or temperature class.
Electrical equipment of types of protection “e,” “m,” “ma,”
“mb,” “px,” “py,” “pz,” or “q” shall be marked Group
Change Description:
Modified language for consistency in used terms. Cable fittings
are not required by ANSI/UL 2225 to be marked with a
temperature class. Also, since product standards have been
revised such that the marking of the Group subdivision is always
required, text covering marking was no longer necessary.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 95 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
II. Electrical equipment of types of protection “d,” “ia,”
“ib,” “ic,” [ia],” “[ib],” or “[ic]” shall be marked Group
IIA, IIB, or IIC, or for a specific gas or vapor. Electrical
equipment of types of protection “n” shall be marked Group
II unless it contains enclosed-break devices, nonincendive
components, or energy-limited equipment or circuits, in
which case it shall be marked Group IIA, IIB, or IIC, or a
specific gas or vapor. Electrical equipment of other types of
protection shall be marked Group II unless the type of
protection utilized by the equipment requires that it be
marked Group IIA, IIB, or IIC, or a specific gas or vapor.
505.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of protection techniques and shall comply with
505.15(A) through (C).
(B) Class I, Zone 1.
(1) General. In Class I, Zone 1 locations, the wiring methods in (B)(1)(a) through (B)(1)(fi) shall be permitted.
(g)
Intrinsic safety type of protection “ib” shall be
permitted using the wiring methods specified in Article
504.
(h)
Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR,
OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted
to be installed in raceways in accordance with 505.15(B).
Optical fiber cable shall be sealed in accordance with
505.16.
(i)
In industrial establishments with restricted public
access, where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, for applications limited to 600 volts nominal or less,
for cable diameters 25 mm (1 in.) or less, and where the
cable is not subject to physical damage, Type TC-ER-HL
cable listed for use in Class I, Zone 1 locations, with an
overall jacket and a separate equipment grounding conductor(s) in accordance with 250.122, and terminated with fittings listed for the location, Type TC-ER-HL cable shall be
installed in accordance with the provisions of Article 336,
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements. In addition, the new subsection adds
TC-ER-HL cable as an acceptable wiring method for industrial
applications where flexibility is required. This cable is approved
for use in classified locations per UL 2225.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 96 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
including the restrictions of 336.10(7).
505.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of protection techniques and shall comply with
505.15(A) through (C).
(C) Class I, Zone 2.
(1) General. In Class I, Zone 2 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(h) Optical fiber cable of Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR,
OFCR, OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted
to be installed in cable trays or any other raceway in accordance with 505.15(C). Optical fiber cable shall be sealed in
accordance with 505.16.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements.
505.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of protection techniques and shall comply with
505.15(A) through (C).
(C) Class I, Zone 2.
(2) Flexible Connections. Where provision must be made
for limited flexibility, flexible metal fittings, flexible metal
conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight flexible metal conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit with listed fittings, or flexible cord in accordance with
the provisions of 505.17 terminated with a listed cord connector that maintains the type of protection of the terminal
compartment shall be permitted.
Exception: For elevator use, an identified elevator cable
of Type EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the “use” column in
Table 400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations,” that is
terminated with listed connectors that maintain the type of
protection of the terminal compartment, shall be permitted.
Change Description:
The change under subsection 505.15(C)(2) correlates the
requirements with Chapter 4.
505.16 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 505.16(A) through (E). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(B) Zone 1. In Class I, Zone 1 locations, seals shall be located
Change Description:
Expanded language to include seals of fiber optic cables.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 97 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
in accordance with 505.16(B)(1) through (B)(8).
(5) Cables Capable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors.
Conduits containing cables with a gas/vaportight continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors through
the cable core shall be sealed in the Zone 1 location after
removing the jacket and any other coverings so that the
sealing compound surrounds each individual insulated conductor or optical fiber tube and the outer jacket.
(6) Cables Incapable of Transmitting Gases or Vapors.
Each multiconductor or optical multifiber cable in conduit
shall be considered as a single conductor or single optical
fiber tube if the cable is incapable of transmitting gases or
vapors through the cable core. These cables shall be sealed
in accordance with 505.16(D).
505.16 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 505.16(A) through (E). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(C) Zone 2. In Class I, Zone 2 locations, seals shall be
located in accordance with 505.16(C)(1) and (C)(2).
(2) Cable Seals. Cable seals shall be located in accordance
with (C)(2)(a), (C)(2)(b), and (C)(2)(c).
(a) Explosionproof and Flameproof Enclosures. Cables
entering enclosures required to be flameproof or
explosionproof shall be sealed at the point of entrance. The
seal shall comply with 505.16(D). Multiconductor or optical
multifiber
cables
with
a
gas/vaportight
continuous sheath capable of transmitting gases or vapors
through the cable core shall be sealed in the Zone 2
location after re- moving the jacket and any other
coverings so that the seal- ing compound surrounds each
individual insulated conduc- tor or optical fiber tube in
such a manner as to minimize the passage of gases and
vapors. Multiconductor or optical multifiber cables in
conduit shall be sealed as described in
Change Description:
Expanded language to include seals of fiber optic cables.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 98 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
505.16(B)(4).
505.16 Sealing and Drainage. Seals in conduit and cable
systems shall comply with 505.16(A) through (E). Sealing
compound shall be used in Type MI cable termination fittings to exclude moisture and other fluids from the cable
insulation.
(D) Class I, Zones 0, 1, and 2. Where required, seals in
Class I, Zones 0, 1, and 2 locations shall comply with
505.16(D)(1) through (D)(5).
(5) Conductor or Optical Fiber Fill. The cross-sectional
area of the conductors or optical fiber tubes (metallic or
nonmetallic) permitted in a seal shall not exceed 25 percent
of the cross-sectional area of a rigid metal conduit of the
same trade size unless it is specifically listed for a higher
percentage of fill.
Change Description:
Expanded language to include seals of fiber optic cables.
505.17 Flexible Cords and Connections.
B) Instrumentation Connections for Zone 2. To facilitate replacements, process control instruments shall be permitted to be connected through flexible cords, attachment
plugs, and receptacles, provided that all of the following
conditions apply:
(1) A switch listed for Zone 2 is provided so that the attachment plug is not depended on to interrupt current,
unless the circuit is type “ia,” “ib,” or “ic” protection,
in which case the switch is not required.
(2) The current does not exceed 3 amperes at 120 volts,
nominal.
(3) The power-supply cord does not exceed 900 mm (3 ft),
is of a type listed for extra-hard usage or for hard usage
if protected by location, and is supplied through an
ttachment plug and receptacle of the locking and
grounding type.
(4) Only necessary receptacles are provided.
(5) The receptacle carries a label warning against unplugging under load.
Change Description:
This added subsection provides requirements for instrumentation
connections, applicable to Zone 2 locations.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 99 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
505.20 Equipment Requirements.
(D) Materials. Equipment marked Group IIC shall be permitted for applications requiring Group IIA or Group IIB
equipment. Similarly, equipment marked Group IIB shall
be permitted for applications requiring Group IIA equipment.
Equipment marked for a specific gas or vapor shall be
permitted for applications where the specific gas or vapor
may be encountered.
Change Description:
This change addresses the suitability of equipment marked with
the chemical formula of a specific material. Although clear in the
product standards, it is not clear in Article 505 that IIC equipment
is suitable for applications requiring IIA or IIB equipment.
Similarly, it is not clear that IIB equipment is suitable for
applications requiring IIA equipment.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
505.21 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In a Class I, Zone 1
location, a multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit
opens all ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit
simultaneously.
Change Description:
The requirements found in this deleted section are already
included in 210.4(B) and do not need to be repeated here.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
505.25 Grounding and Bonding. Regardless of the volt- Change Description:
age of the electrical system, Ggrounding and bonding shall This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
comply with Article 250 and the requirements in 505.25(A)
and (B).
1
505.26 Process Sealing. This section shall apply to
process-connected equipment, which includes, but is not
limited to, canned pumps, submersible pumps, flow, pressure, temperature, or analysis measurement instruments. A
process seal is a device to prevent the migration of process
fluids from the designed containment into the external electrical system. Process connected electrical equipment that
incorporates a single process seal, such as a single compression seal, diaphragm, or tube to prevent flammable or
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change correlates the requirements with ANSI/ISA-12.27.01.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 100 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
combustible fluids from entering a conduit or cable system
capable of transmitting fluids, shall be provided with an
additional means to mitigate a single process seal failure.
The additional means may include, but is not limited to the
following:
(4) An add-on secondary seal marked “secondary seal” and
rated for the pressure and temperature conditions to which
it will be subjected upon failure of the single process seal.
ARTICLE 506
Zone 20, 21, and 22 Locations for Combustible Dusts or Ignitible Fibers/Flyings
506.1 Scope. This article covers the requirements for the
Change Description:
zone classification system as an alternative to the division
This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
classification system covered in Article 500, Article 502,
and Article 503 for electrical and electronic equipment and
wiring for all voltages in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22
hazardous (classified) locations where fire and explosion
hazards may exist due to combustible dusts or ignitible
fibers/flyings. Combustible metallic dusts are not covered
by the requirements of this article.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Combustible Dust. Any finely divided solid material Dust
particles that is 420are 500 microns (0.017 in.) or smaller in
diameter (material passing a U.S. No. 4035 Standard Sieve)
Sieve as defined in ASTM E 11-09, Standard Specification
for Wire Cloth and Sieves for Testing Purposes) and presents a fire or explosion hazard when dispersed and ignited
in air. [499:3.3.3]
Change Description:
Revised to align with the changed definition found in NFPA 499.
506.3 Other Articles. All other applicable rules contained
in this Code shall apply to electrical equipment and wiring
installed in hazardous (classified) locations.
Change Description:
Added clarification regarding applicability of other articles in the
Code to this article.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: As modified by Article 504 and this article.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 101 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
506.6 Material Groups. For the purposes of testing, approval, and area classification, various air mixtures (not
oxygen enriched) shall be grouped as required in 506.6(A),
(B), and (C).
A) Group IIIC. Combustible metal dust.
(B) Group IIIB. Combustible dust other than combustible
metal dust.
(C) Group IIIA. Solid particles, including fibers, greater
than 500 µm in nominal size, which may be suspended in
air and could settle out of the atmosphere under their own
weight.
506.8 Protection Techniques. Acceptable protection techniques for electrical and electronic equipment in hazardous
(classified) locations shall be as described in 506.8(A)
through (J).
(C) Intrinsic Safety. This protection technique shall be
permitted for equipment in Zone 20, Zone 21, and Zone 22
locations for which it is identified. Installation of intrinsically safe apparatus and wiring shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Article 504.
(HG) Protection by Enclosure “tD”.“t”. This protection
technique shall be permitted for equipment in Zone 2120,
Zone 21, and Zone 22 locations for which it is identified.
506.9 Equipment Requirements.
(C) Marking.
(1) Division Equipment. Equipment identified for Class
II, Division 1 or Class II, Division 2 shall, in addition to
being marked in accordance with 500.8(C), be permitted to
be marked with bothall of the following:
(2) Temperature classificationMaterial group in accordance
with 506.9(D)506.6
(3) Maximum surface temperature in accordance with
506.9(D), marked as a temperature value in degrees C,
preceded by “T” and followed by the symbol “°C”
Change Description:
Added dust groups to properly provide criteria for selection and
application of the currently manufactured equipment.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Relocated requirements for intrinsically safe apparatus to Section
506.15. Also, revised enclosure marking to correlate with
ANSI/ISA-60079-31 and ANSI/ISA-61241-1.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change adds requirements for marking dust groups,
necessary for proper selection of equipment. Also, revised Table
506.9(C)(2)(3) to add new designations per ISA 60079-11.
Added exception for associated intrinsically safe apparatus not
exposed to combustible dust, not requiring a temperature
classification. This is already addressed for gases in 505.9(B)(2)
Exception 1.
Impact(s) :
Page 102 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(2) Zone Equipment. Equipment meeting one or more of
the protection techniques described in 506.8 shall be
marked with the following in the order shown:
(1) Zone
(2) Symbol “AEx”
(3) Protection technique(s) in accordance with Table
506.9(C)(2)(3)
(4) Temperature classification, marked as a temperature
value, in degrees C, preceded by TMaterial group in
accordance with 506.6
(5) Maximum surface temperature in accordance with
506.9(D), marked as a temperature value in degrees C,
preceded by “T” and followed by the symbol “°C”
(56)Ambient temperature marking in accordance with
506.9(D)
No negative impact.
Exception: Associated apparatus NOT suitable for installation in a hazardous (classified) location shall be required
to be marked only with 506.9(C)(2)(2), (3), and (5), but
BOTH the symbol AEx in 506.9(C)(2)(2) and the symbol for
the type of protection in 506.9(C)(2)(3) shall be enclosed
within the same square brackets; for example, [AEx iaD]
or [AEx ia] IIIC.
506.9 Equipment Requirements.
(D) Temperature Classifications. Equipment shall be
marked to show the operating maximum surface temperature referenced to a 40°C (104°F) ambient. ambient, or at
the higher marked ambient temperature if the equipment is
rated and marked for an ambient temperature of greater
than 40°C. For equipment installed in a Zone 20 or Zone 21
location, the operating temperature shall be based on operation of the equipment when blanketed with the maximum
amount of dust (or with dust-simulating fibers/flyings) that
can accumulate on the equipment. Electrical equipment designed for use in the ambient temperature range between
−20°C and +40°C shall require no additional ambient tem-
Change Description:
Clarified the requirements for defining temperature class as
referring to operating temperature when blanketed with dust.
Also, removed informational text in this section.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 103 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
perature marking. Electrical equipment that is designed for
use in a range of ambient temperatures other than −20°C
and +40°C is considered to be special; and the ambient
temperature range shall then be marked on the equipment,
including either the symbol “Ta” or “Tamb” together with
the special range of ambient temperatures. As an example,
such a marking might be “–30°C ≤ Ta ≤ +40°C.” Electrical
equipment suitable for ambient temperatures exceeding
40°C (104°F) shall be marked with both the maximum ambient temperature and the operating temperature at that ambient temperature.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(A) Zone 20. In Zone 20 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(1) Threaded rigid metal conduit or threaded steel intermediate metal conduit.
(2) Type MI cable terminated with fittings listed for the
location. Type MI cable shall be installed and sup- ported in
a manner to avoid tensile stress at the termi- nation fittings.
Change Description:
The wiring methods permitted for intrinsically safe apparatus
in explosive dust atmospheres classified under the zone scheme
are different from those permitted under the Division scheme.
The wiring methods for intrinsically safe apparatus were
previously addressed in Section 506.8 – Protection techniques.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception No. 2: Equipment identified as intrinsically safe
“iaD” or “ia” shall be permitted to be connected using the
wiring methods identified in 504.20.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(A) Zone 20. In Zone 20 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(6) Where necessary to employ flexible connections, liquidtight flexible metal conduit with listed fittings, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit with listed fittings,
or flexible cord listed for extra-hard usage and provided
with listed fittings shall be used. Where flexible cords
Change Description:
The change under subsection 506.15(A)(6) correlates the
requirements with Chapter 4.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 104 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
are used, they shall also comply with 506.17 and shall
be terminated with a listed cord connector that maintains the type of protection of the terminal compartment. Where flexible connections are subject to oil or
other corrosive conditions, the insulation of the conductors shall be of a type listed for the condition or
shall be protected by means of a suitable sheath.
Exception No. 2: For elevator use, an identified elevator
cable of Type EO, ETP, or ETT, shown under the “use”
column in Table 400.4 for “hazardous (classified) locations,” and terminated with listed connectors that maintain
the type of protection of the terminal compartment shall be
permitted.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(A) Zone 20. In Zone 20 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(7) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,
OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted to be
installed in raceways in accordance with 506.15(A).
Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in accordance with
506.16.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(B) Zone 21. In Zone 21 locations, the wiring methods in
(B)(1) and (B)(2) shall be permitted.
(1) All wiring methods permitted in 506.15(A).
(2) Fittings and boxes that are dusttight, provided with
threaded bosses for connection to conduit, in which taps,
joints, or terminal connections are not made, and are not
used in locations where metal dust is present, may be
used.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The wiring methods permitted for intrinsically safe apparatus
in explosive dust atmospheres classified under the zone scheme
are different from those permitted under the Division scheme.
The wiring methods for intrinsically safe apparatus were
previously addressed in Section 506.8 – Protection techniques.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: Equipment identified as intrinsically safe “ibD” or
Page 105 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
“ib” shall be permitted to be connected using the wiring methods
identified in 504.20.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(C) Zone 22. In Zone 22 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(7) Nonincendive field wiring Intrinsic safety type of protection “ic” shall be permitted using any of the wiring
methods permitted for unclassified locations. Nonincendive field wiring Intrinsic safety type of protection
“ic” systems shall be installed in accordance with the
control drawing(s).
Simple Simple apparatus, not
shown on the control drawing, shall be permitted in a
nonincendive field wiring circuit, circuit of intrinsic
safety type of protection “ic”, provided that the simple
apparatus does not interconnect the nonincendive field
wiringintrinsic safety type of protection “ic” circuit to
any other circuit.
Separation of nonincendive field wiring circuitscircuits of intrinsic safety type of protection “ic” shall
be in accordance with one of the following:
Change Description:
The wiring methods permitted for intrinsically safe apparatus
in explosive dust atmospheres classified under the zone scheme
are different from those permitted under the Division scheme.
The wiring methods for intrinsically safe apparatus were
previously addressed in Section 506.8 – Protection techniques.
506.15 Wiring Methods. Wiring methods shall maintain
the integrity of the protection techniques and shall comply
with 506.15(A), (B), or (C).
(C) Zone 22. In Zone 22 locations, the following wiring
methods shall be permitted.
(9) Optical fiber cable Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR,
OFNG, OFCG, OFN, and OFC shall be permitted to be
installed in cable trays or any raceway in accordance with
506.15(C). Optical fiber cables shall be sealed in
accordance with 506.16.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for correlation with Chapter 7 which allows
the listed optical fiber cables in classified locations if sealed per
Chapter 5 requirements.
506.20 Equipment Installation.
(D) Material Group. Equipment marked Group IIIC shall
be permitted for applications requiring IIIA or IIIB equipment. Similarly, equipment marked Group IIIB shall be
Change Description:
This change addresses the suitability of equipment marked with
the chemical formula of a specific material. Although clear in the
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 106 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
permitted for applications requiring IIIA equipment.
product standards, it is not clear in Article 506 that IIIC equipment
is suitable for applications requiring IIIA or IIIB equipment.
Similarly, it is not clear that IIIB equipment is suitable for
applications requiring IIIA equipment.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
506.21 Multiwire Branch Circuits. In Zone 20 and Zone
21 locations, a multiwire branch circuit shall not be permitted.
Exception: Where the disconnect device(s) for the circuit
opens all ungrounded conductors of the multiwire circuit
simultaneously.
506.25 Grounding and Bonding. Regardless of the voltage of the electrical system, Ggrounding and bonding shall
comply with Article 250 and the requirements in 506.25(A)
and (B).
Change Description:
The requirements found in this deleted section are already
included in 210.4(B) and do not need to be repeated here.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change clarifies the applicability of this section.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 514
Motor Fuel Dispensing Facilities
514.3 Classification of Locations. [See Figure 514.3.]
Change Description:
(C) Motor Fuel Dispensing Stations in Boatyards and
Relocated the area classification requirements from 555.21(B)
Marinas.
into a new 514.3(C ). Area classification requirements for motor
(1) General. Electrical wiring and equipment located at or
fuel dispensing are not appropriate for Section 555.21.
serving motor fuel dispensing locations shall be installed on
the side of the wharf, pier, or dock opposite from the liquid
piping system.
(2) Classification of Class I, Division 1 and 2 Areas. The
following criteria shall be used for the purposes of applying
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 107 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Table 514.3(B)(1) and Table 514.3(B)(2) to motor fuel dispensing equipment on floating or fixed piers, wharfs, or
docks.
(D) Closed Construction. Where the construction of floating docks, piers, or wharfs is closed so that there is no
space between the bottom of the dock, pier, or wharf and
the water, as in the case of concrete-enclosed expanded
foam or similar construction, and the construction includes
integral service boxes with supply chases, the following
shall apply:
(1) The space above the surface of the floating dock, pier,
or wharf shall be a Class I, Division 2 location with
distances as specified in Table 514.3(B)(1) for dispenser and outdoor locations.
(2) Spaces below the surface of the floating dock, pier, or
wharf that have areas or enclosures, such as tubs, voids,
pits, vaults, boxes, depressions, fuel piping chases, or
similar spaces, where flammable liquid or vapor can
accumulate shall be a Class I, Division 1 location.
Exception No. 1: Dock, pier, or wharf sections that do not
support fuel dispensers and abut, but are located 6.0 m
(20 ft) or more from, dock sections that support a fuel
dispenser(s) shall be permitted to be Class I, Division 2
locations where documented air space is provided between
dock sections to allow flammable liquids or vapors to dissipate without traveling to such dock sections. The documentation shall comply with 500.4(A).
Exception No. 2: Dock, pier, or wharf sections that do not
support fuel dispensers and do not directly abut sections
that support fuel dispensers shall be permitted to be unclassified where documented air space is provided and where
flammable liquids or vapors cannot travel to such dock
sections. The documentation shall comply with 500.4(A).
(E)
Open
Construction.
Where
the
construction of piers, wharfs, or docks is open,
as in the case of decks built on stringers
supported by pilings, floats, pontoons, or similar
Page 108 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
construction, the following shall apply:
(1) The area 450 mm (18 in.) above the surface of the dock,
pier, or wharf and extending 6.0 m (20 ft) hori- zontally
in all directions from the outside edge of the dispenser
and down to the water level shall be a Class 1, Division
2 location.
(2) Enclosures such as tubs, voids, pits, vaults, boxes, depressions, piping chases, or similar spaces where flammable liquids or vapors can accumulate within 6.0 m
(20 ft) of the dispenser shall be a Class I, Division 1
location.
ARTICLE 514
Spray Application, Dipping, Coating, and CoatingPrinting Processes Using Flammable or Combustible Materials
Flash-Off Area. An open or enclosed area after a spray
Change Description:
1
application process where vapors are released due to expoAdded new definitions to Article 514 per NFPA 33.
sure to ambient air or a heated atmosphere. [33:3.3.1.1]
Limited Finishing Workstation. An apparatus that is capable of confining the vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or
deposits that are generated by a spray application process
and that meets the requirements of Section 14.3 of
NFPA 33, Standard for Spray Application Using Flammable or Combustible Materials, but does not meet the
requirements of a spray booth or spray room, as herein
defined. [33:3.3.15.1]
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Resin Application Area. Any area in which polyester resins or gelcoats are spray applied. [33:3.3.1.2]
Spray Area. Normally, locations outside of buildings or
localized operations within a larger room or space. Such are
normally
provided
with
some
local
vapor
extraction/ventilation system. In automated operations, the
area limits shall be the maximum area in the direct path of
spray operations. In manual operations, the area limits shall
be the maximum area of spray when aimed at 180 degrees
Change Description:
Revised Spray Area definition per NFPA 33.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 109 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
to the application surface.
Any fully enclosed, partly enclosed, or unenclosed area in
which ignitible quantities of flammable or combustible vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or deposits are present due to
the operation of spray processes, including (1) any area in
the direct path of a spray application process; (2) the interior of a spray booth or spray room or limited finishing
workstation, as herein defined; (3) the interior of any exhaust plenum, eliminator section, or scrubber section; (4)
the interior of any exhaust duct or exhaust stack leading
from a spray application process; (5) the interior of any air
recirculation filter house or enclosure, including secondary
recirculation particulate filters; (6) any solvent concentrator
(pollution abatement) unit or solvent recovery (distillation)
unit. The following are not considered to be a part of the
spray area: (1) fresh air make-up units; (2) air supply ducts
and air supply plenums; (3) recirculation air supply ducts
downstream of secondary filters; (4) exhaust ducts from
solvent concentrator (pollution abatement) units.
[33:3.3.2.3]
Spray Booth. An enclosure or insert within a larger room
used for spray/coating/dipping applications. A spray booth
may be fully enclosed or have open front or face and may
include separate conveyor entrance and exit. The spray
booth is provided with a dedicated ventilation exhaust but
may draw supply air from the larger room or have a dedicated air supply.
A power-ventilated enclosure for a spray application operation or process that confines and limits the escape of the
material being sprayed, including vapors, mists, dusts, and
residues that are produced by the spraying operation and
conducts or directs these materials to an exhaust system.
[33:3.3.14]
Change Description:
Revised Spray Booth definition per NFPA 33.
Spray Room. A power-ventilated fully enclosed room used
exclusively for open spraying of flammable or combustible
materials. A spray room is a purposefully enclosed room built
Change Description:
Revised Spray Room definition per NFPA 33.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 110 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
for spray/coating/dipping applications provided with dedicated
ventilation supply and exhaust. Normally the room is configured to house the item to be painted, providing reasonable
access around the item/process. Depending on the size of the
item being painted, such rooms may actually be the entire
building or the major portion thereof. [33:3.3.15]
Unenclosed Spray Area. Any spray area that is not confined by a limited finishing workstation, spray booth, or
spray room, as herein defined. [33:3.3.2.3.2]
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Revised Unenclosed Spray Area definition per NFPA 33.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
516.3 Classification of Locations. Classification is based
on dangerous quantities of flammable vapors, combustible
mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are present or might
be present in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible or
explosive mixtures with air.
(A) Zone Classification of Locations.
(1) For the purposes of this article, the zone system of
electrical area classification shall be applied as follows:
a. The inside of open or closed containers or vessels
shall be considered a Class I, Zone 0 location.
b. A Class I, Division 1 location shall be permitted to be
alternatively classified as a Class I, Zone 1 location.
c. A Class I, Division 2 location shall be permitted to be
alternatively classified as a Class I, Zone 2 location.
d. A Class II, Division 1 location shall be permitted to
be alternatively classified as a Zone 21 location.
e. A Class II, Division 2 location shall be permitted to
be alternatively classified as a Zone 22 location.
[33: 6.2.2]
(2) For the purposes of electrical area classification, the
division system and the zone system shall not be intermixed for any given source of release. [33:6.2.3]
(3) In instances of areas within the same facility classified
separately, Class I, Zone 2 locations shall be permitted
Change Description:
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 33.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 111 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
to abut, but not overlap, Class I, Division 2 locations.
Class I, Zone 0 or Zone 1 locations shall not abut Class
I, Division 1 or Division 2 locations. [33:6.2.4]
(4) Open flames, spark-producing equipment or processes,
and equipment whose exposed surfaces exceed the autoignition temperature of the material being sprayed shall
not be located in a spray area or in any surrounding area
that is classified as Division 2, Zone 2, or Zone 22.
Exception: This requirement shall not apply to drying, curing, or fusing apparatus. [33:6.2.5]
(5) Any utilization equipment or apparatus that is capable
of producing sparks or particles of hot metal and that is
located above or adjacent to either the spray area or the
urrounding Division 2, Zone 2, or Zone 22 areas shall be
of the totally enclosed type or shall be constructed to
prevent the escape of sparks or particles of hot metal.
[33: 6.2.6]
516.3 Classification of Locations. Classification is based
on dangerous quantities of flammable vapors, combustible
mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are present or might
be present in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible or
explosive mixtures with air.
(AB) Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 0 Locations.
The following spaces shall be considered Class I, Division
1, or Class I, Zone 0, as applicable:
(3) The interior of any ink fountain, ink reservoir, or ink
tank
Change Description:
Replaced unenforceable language and clarified the requirement.
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 34.
516.3 Classification of Locations. Classification is based
on dangerous quantities of flammable vapors, combustible
mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are present or might
be present in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible or
explosive mixtures with air.
Change Description:
Replaced unenforceable language and clarified the requirement.
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 34.
(BC) Class Ior I, Division 1; Class I, Zone 1; Class II,
Division 1; or Zone 21 Locations. The following spaces
shall be considered Class I, Division 1, or Class I, Zone 1, or
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 112 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Class II, Division 1, or Zone 21 locations, as applicable:
(7) For limited finishing workstations, the area inside the
curtains or partitions. See Figure 516.3(D)(5).
516.3 Classification of Locations. Classification is based
on dangerous quantities of flammable vapors, combustible
mists, residues, dusts, or deposits that are present or might
be present in quantities sufficient to produce ignitible or
explosive mixtures with air.
(CD) Class Ior I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class II,
Division 2; or Zone 22 Locations. The following spaces
shall be considered Class I, Division 2, or 2; Class I,
Zone 2, or 2; Class II, Division 2; or Zone 22, as
applicable.
(1) Open Spraying.Unenclosed Spray Processes. For
openunenclosed spraying, all space outside of but within 6 m
(20 ft) horizontally and 3 m (10 ft) vertically of the Class I,
Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 location as defined in 516.3(A),
and not separated from it by partitions. See Figure
16.3(CD)(1). [33:6.5.1]
(2) Closed-Top, Open-Face, and Open-Front Spraying.
Spray Booths and Spray Rooms. If spray application operations are conducted within a closed-top, open-face, or
open-front booth or room, as shown in Figure 516.3(D)(2) ,
any electrical wiring or utilization equipment located outside of the booth or room but within the boundaries designated as Division 2 or Zone 2 in Figure 516.3(C)(2) 915
mm (3 ft) of any opening shall be suitable for Class I,
Division 2; Class I, Zone 2, or 2; Class II, Division 2;or
Zone 22 locations, whichever is applicable. The Class I,
Division 2; Class I, Zone 2, or 2; Class II, Division 2;or
Zone 22 locations shown in Figure 516.3(CD)(2) shall extend from the edges of the open face or open front of the
booth or room in accordance with the following:
Change Description:
Replaced unenforceable language and clarified the requirement.
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 33 and 34.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(a) If the exhaust ventilation system is interlocked with
the spray application equipment, the Division 2 or Zone 2
location shall extend 1.5 m (5 ft) horizontally and 900 mm
(3 ft) vertically from the open face or open front of the
booth or room, as shown in Figure 516.3(C)(2), top.
Page 113 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(b) If the exhaust ventilation system is not interlocked
with the spray application equipment, the Division 2 or
Zone 2 location shall extend 3 m (10 ft) horizontally and
900 mm (3 ft) vertically from the open face or open front of
the booth or room, as shown in Figure 516.3(C)(2), bottom.
For the purposes of this subsection, interlocked shall mean
that the spray application equipment cannot be oper- ated
unless the exhaust ventilation system is operating and
functioning properly and spray application is automatically
stopped if the exhaust ventilation system fails. [33:6.5.2.2]
Figure 516.3(D)(2) Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class
II, Division 2; or Zone 22 Locations Adjacent to a Closed Top,
Open Face, or Open Front Spray Booth or Room.
(3) Open-Top Spraying.Spray Booths. For spraying operations conducted within an open top spray booth, the
space 900915 mm (3 ft) vertically above the booth and
within 900915 mm (3 ft) of other booth openings shall be
considered Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; or Class II,
Division 2; or Zone 22. [33:6.5.3]
(4) Enclosed Spray Booths and Spray Rooms. For spraying operations confined to an enclosed spray booth or room,
the space within 900 mm (3 ft) in all directions from any
openings considered Class I, Division 2; or Class I, Zone 2;
or Class II, Division 2 as shown in Figure
516.3(C)(4).electrical area classification shall be as follows:
[33:6.5.4]
(5) Dip Tanks and Drain Boards — Surrounding Space.
For dip tanks and drain boards, the 914-mm (3-ft) space
surrounding the Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1
location as defined in 516.3(A)(4) and as shown in Figure
516.3(C)(5). [34:6.4.4]
(6) Dip Tanks and Drain Boards — Space Above Floor.
For dip tanks and drain boards, the space 900 mm (3 ft)
above the floor and extending 6 m (20 ft) horizontally in all
directions from the Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1
location.
Exception: This space shall not be required to be considered a hazardous (classified) location where the vapor
Page 114 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
source area is 0.46 m2 (5 ft2) or less and where the
contents of the open tank trough or container do not
exceed 19 L (5 gal). In addition, the vapor concentration
during operation and shutdown periods shall not exceed
25 percent of the lower flammable limit outside the Class I
location specified in 516.3(B)(4). [34:6.4.4 Exception]
(1) The area within 915 mm (3 ft) of any opening shall be
classified as Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class
II, Division 2; or Zone 22 locations, whichever is applicable, as shown in Figure 516.3(D)(4)(1).
(2) Where exhaust air is recirculated, both of the following
shall apply:
a. The interior of any recirculation path from the secondary particulate filters up to and including the air
supply plenum shall be classified as Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class II, Division 2; or Zone
22 locations, whichever is applicable.
b. The interior of fresh air supply ducts shall be
unclassified.
(3) Where exhaust air is not recirculated, the interior of
fresh air supply ducts and fresh air supply plenums
shall be unclassified.
(5) Limited Finishing Workstations. For limited finishing
workstations, the area inside the 915-mm (3-ft) space horizontally and vertically beyond the volume enclosed by the
outside surface of the curtains or partitions shall be classified as Class I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class II, Division 2; or Zone 22, as shown in Figure 516.3(D)(5).
6) Areas Adjacent to Open Dipping and Coating Processes. Electrical wiring and electrical utilization equip- ment
located adjacent to open processes shall meet the requirements
of
516(D)(6)(1)
through
(4)
and
Figure 516.3(D)(6)(a), Figure 516.3(D)(6)(b), Figure
516.3(D)(6)(c), Figure
516.3(D)(6)(d), or Figure
516.3(D)(6)(e), whichever is applicable. [34:6.4]
(1) Electrical wiring and electrical utilization equipment
located in any sump, pit, or below grade channel that is
Page 115 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
within 7620 mm (25 ft) horizontally of a vapor source, as
defined by this standard, shall be suitable for Class I,
Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 locations. If the sump, pit, or
channel extends beyond 7620 mm (25 ft) of the vapor
source, it shall be provided with a vapor stop, or it shall
be classified as Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 for
its entire length. [34:6.4.1]
(2) Electrical wiring and electrical utilization equipment
located within 1525 mm (5 ft) of a vapor source shall be
suitable for Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1
locations. The space inside a dip tank, ink fountain, ink
reservoir, or ink tank shall be classified as Class I,
Division 1 or Class I, Zone 0, whichever is applicable.
[34:6.4.2]
(3) Electrical wiring and electrical utilization equipment
located within 915 mm (3 ft) of the Class I, Division 1 or
Class I, Zone 1 location described in 516.3(D)(6)(2)
shall be suitable for Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone
2 locations, whichever is applicable. [34:6.4.3]
(4) The space 915 mm (3 ft) above the floor and extending
6100 mm (20 ft) horizontally in all directions from the
Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 location described in 6.4.3 shall be classified as Class I, Division 2
or Class I, Zone 2, and electrical wiring and electrical
utilization equipment located within this space shall be
suitable for Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2
locations, whichever is applicable. [34:6.4.4]
Exception: This space shall be permitted to be unclassified
for purposes of electrical installations if the surface area of
the vapor source does not exceed 0.5 m2 (5 ft2), the contents of the dip tank, ink fountain, ink reservoir, or ink tank
do not exceed 19 L (5 gal), and the vapor concentration
during operating and shutdown periods does not exceed
25 percent of the lower flammable limit.
(D7) Enclosed Coating and Dipping Operations. Areas
adjacent to enclosed dipping and coating processes shall be
Page 116 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
classified in accordance with 516.3(D)(7) and Figure
516.3(D)(7). The space adjacent to an enclosed dipping or
coating process or apparatus shall be considered unclassified. [34:6.5.3]
Exception: The space within 900915 mm (3 ft) in all
direc- tions from any opening in the enclosures shall be
classified as Class I, Division 2 or Class I, Zone 2, as
applicable. [34:6.5.2]
The interior of any enclosed dipping or coating process
or apparatus shall be a Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone
1 location, and electrical wiring and electrical utilization
equipment located within this space shall be suitable for
Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 1 locations, whichever
is applicable. The area inside the dip tank shall be classified
as Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Zone 0, whichever is
applicable. [34:6.5.1]
516.4 Wiring and Equipment in Class I Locations.
(B) Wiring and Equipment — Vapors and Residues.
Unless specifically listed for locations containing deposits
of dangerous quantities of flammable or combustible vapors, mists, residues, dusts, or deposits (as applicable),
there shall be no electrical equipment in any spray area as
herein defined whereon deposits of combustible residue
may readily accumulate, except wiring in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, Type MI cable, or in metal
boxes or fittings containing no taps, splices, or terminal
connections. [33:6.4.2]accumulate. All electrical wiring
shall be comply with 516.4(A).
(C) Illumination. Illumination of readily ignitible areas
through panels of glass or other transparent or translucent
material shall be permitted only if it complies with the
following:
(1) Fixed lighting units are used as the source of illumination.Luminaires, like that shown in Figure
516.4(C)(1), that are attached to the walls or ceiling of
a spray area but that are outside any classified area and
are separated from the spray area by glass panels shall
Change Description:
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 33 and 34.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 117 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
be suitable for use in unclassified locations. Such fix[33:6.6.1]
(2) The panel effectively isolates the Class I location from
the area in which the lighting unit is located.Luminaires, like that shown in Figure 516.4(C)(1), that are
attached to the walls or ceiling of a spray area; that are
separated from the spray area by glass panels and that
are located within a Class I, Division 2; a Class I, Zone
2; a Class II, Division 2; or a Zone 22 location shall be
suitable for such location. Such fixtures shall be serviced from outside the spray area. [33:6.6.2]
(3) The lighting unit is identified for its specific location.
Luminaires, like that shown in Figure 516.4(C)(3),
that are an integral part of the walls or ceiling of a
spray area shall be permitted to be separated from the
spray area by glass panels that are an integral part of
the fixture. Such fixtures shall be listed for use in Class
I, Division 2; Class I, Zone 2; Class II, Division 2; or
Zone 22 locations, whichever is applicable, and also
shall be listed for accumulations of deposits of combustible residues. Such fixtures shall be permitted to be
serviced from inside the spray area. [33:6.6.3]
(4) The panel is of a material or is protected so that break-age
is unlikely.Glass panels used to separate luminaires from
the spray area or that are an integral part of the luminaire
shall meet the following requirements.
a. Panels for light fixtures or for observation shall be
of heat-treated glass, laminated glass, wired glass,
or hammered-wired glass and shall be sealed to confine vapors, mists, residues, dusts, and deposits to
the spray area. [33:5.5.1]
Exception: Listed spray booth assemblies that have vision
panels constructed of other materials shall be permitted.
(5) b. The arrangement is such that normal accumulations
of hazardous residue on the surface of the panel will
not be raised to a dangerous temperature by radiation or conduction from the source of illumination.
Page 118 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Panels for light fixtures shall be separated from the
fixture to prevent the surface temperature of the
panel from exceeding 93°C (200°F). [33:5.5.2]
c. The panel frame and method of attachment shall be
designed to not fail under fire exposure before the
vision panel fails. [33:5.5.3]
(F) Static Electric Discharges.
(1) All persons and all electrically conductive objects, including any metal parts of the process equipment or
apparatus, containers of material, exhaust ducts, and
piping systems that convey flammable or combustible
liquids, shall be electrically grounded. [34:6.8.1]
(2) Provision shall be made to dissipate static electric charges
from all nonconductive substrates in printing processes.
516.10 Special Equipment.
(A) Fixed Electrostatic Equipment. This section shall apply to any equipment using electrostatically charged elements for the atomization, charging, and/or precipitation of
hazardous materials for coatings on articles or for other
similar purposes in which the charging or atomizing device
is attached to a mechanical support or manipulator. This
shall include robotic devices. This section shall not apply to
devices that are held or manipulated by hand. Where robot
or programming procedures involve manual manipulation
of the robot arm while spraying with the high voltage on,
the provisions of 516.10(B) shall apply. The installation of
electrostatic spraying equipment shall comply with
516.10(A)(1) through (A)(10). Spray equipment shall be
listed except as otherwise permitted. All automatic electrostatic equipment systems shall comply with 516.4(A)(1)
through (A)(9). [33:11.5]
(10) Other Than Nonincendive Equipment. Spray equipment that cannot be classified as nonincendive shall comply
with (A)(10)(a) and (A)(10)(b).
(a) Conveyors or, hangers, and application equipment shall
be arranged so as to maintain that a safe distanceminimum separation of at least twice the sparking distance is
Change Description:
Revised to correlate this section with NFPA 33 and made editorial
changes to clarify the language.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 119 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
maintained between goods the workpiece or material being
paintedsprayed and electrodes, electrostatic atomizing
heads, or charged conductors. Warnings defining this safe
distance shall be posted. [33:11.4.1]
(B) Electrostatic Hand-Spraying Equipment. This section shall apply to any equipment using electrostatically
charged elements for the atomization, charging, and/oror
precipitation of flammable and combustible materials for
coatings on articles, or for other similar purposes in which
the charging or atomizing device is hand-held orand manipulated during the spraying operation. Electrostatic handspraying equipment and devices used in connection with
paint-spraying operations shall be of listed types and shall
comply with 516.10(B)(1) through (B)(5).
(3) Handle. The handle of the spraying gun shall be electrically connected to ground by a metallic connectionconductive material and be constructed so that the operator in
normal operating position is in intimatedirect electrical
contact with the grounded handle with a resistance of not
more than 1 megohm to prevent buildup of a static charge
on the operator’s body. Signs indicating the necessity for
grounding other persons entering the spray area shall be
conspicuously posted.
(4) Electrostatic Equipment. All electrically conductive
objects in the spraying area, except those objects required
by the process to be at high voltage, shall be adequately
grounded.electrically connected to ground with a resistance
of not more than 1 megohm. This requirement shall apply
to paint containers, wash cans, and any other electrical conductive objects or devices in the area. The equipment shall
carry a prominent, permanently installed warning regarding
the necessity for this grounding feature.
ARTICLE 517
Health Care Facilities
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 520
Page 120 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Theaters, Audience Areas of Motion Picture and Television Studios, Performance Areas, and
Similar Locations
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 522
Control Systems for Permanent
Amusement Attractions
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 525
Carnivals, Circuses, Fairs, and Similar Events
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 530
Motion Picture and Television Studios, and Similar Locations
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 540
Motion Picture Projection Rooms
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 547
Agricultural Buildings
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 550
Mobile Homes, Manufactured Homes, and Mobile Home Parks
550.15 Wiring Methods and Materials. Except as speChange Description:
cifically limited in this section, the wiring methods and
Editorial change, clarifying requirements.
materials included in this Code shall be used in mobile
homes. Aluminum conductors, aluminum alloy conductors,
and aluminum core conductors such as copper-clad aluminum
shall not be acceptable for use as branch-circuit wiring.
(H) Under-Chassis Wiring (Exposed to Weather).
Where outdoor or under-chassis line-voltage (120 volts,
nominal, or higher) wiring is exposed to moisture or physical damage, it shall be protected by rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit, except as provided in (1) or (2).
a conduit or raceway approved for use in wet locations or
where subject to physical damage. The conductors shall be
suitablelisted for use in wet locations.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 121 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(1) Where closely routed against frames and equipment
enclosures, reinforced thermosetting resin conduit
(RTRC) listed for aboveground use, Type MI cable,
electrical metallic tubing, or rigid polyvinyl chloride
conduit (PVC) shall be permitted.
(2) Where extending vertically from a direct-burial depth
of at least 457 mm (18 in.) below grade and terminated
to a factory-installed conduit or enclosure, Schedule 80
PVC or RTRC listed for exposure to physical damage.
ARTICLE 551
Recreational Vehicles and Recreational Vehicle Parks
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 552
Park Trailers
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 553
Floating Buildings
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 555
Marinas and Boatyards
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
590.4 General.
(J) Support. Cable assemblies and flexible cords and
cables shall be supported in place at intervals that ensure
that they will be protected from physical damage. Support
shall be in the form of staples, cable ties, straps, or similar
type fittings installed so as not to cause damage. Cable
assemblies and flexible cords and cables installed as branch
circuits or feeders shall not be installed on the floor or on
the ground. Extension cords shall not be required to comply
with 590.4(J). Vegetation shall not be used for support of
overhead spans of branch circuits or feeders.
ARTICLE 590
Temporary Installations
Change Description:
Restricted temporary installation requirements by not allowing
cable assemblies and flexible cords to be installed on the floor or
on the ground. This restriction does not include extension cords.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact. Procedures addressing
temporary wiring may need to be reviewed to ensure compliance
with this new requirement.
Page 122 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
590.6 Ground-Fault Protection for Personnel. Groundfault protection for personnel for all temporary wiring installations shall be provided to comply with 590.6(A) and
(B). This section shall apply only to temporary wiring installations used to supply temporary power to equipment
used by personnel during construction, remodeling, maintenance, repair, or demolition of buildings, structures,
equipment, or similar activities. This section shall apply to
power derived from an electric utility company or from an
on-site-generated power source.
(A) Receptacle Outlets. Temporary receptacle installations used to supply temporary power to equipment used by
personnel during construction, remodeling, maintenance,
repair, or demolition of buildings, structures, equipment, or
similar activities shall comply with the requirements of
590.6(A)(1) through (A)(3), as applicable.
Change Description:
This change clarifies the requirement for GFI protection of
personnel, allowing use of listed cord sets or devices with GFI
protection, in addition to GFI protected outlets.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: In industrial establishments only, where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only
qualified personnel are involved, an assured equipment
grounding conductor program as specified in 590.6(B)(2)
shall be permitted for only those receptacle outlets used to
supply equipment that would create a greater hazard if
power were interrupted or having a design that is not compatible with GFCI protection.
(1) Receptacle Outlets Not Part of Permanent Wiring.
All 125-volt, single-phase, 15-, 20-, and 30-ampere receptacle outlets that are not a part of the permanent wiring of
the building or structure and that are in use by personnel
shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for
personnel. Listed cord sets or devices incorporating listed
ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel
identified for portable use shall be permitted.
ARTICLE 600
Electric Signs and Outline Lighting
600.6 Disconnects. Each sign and outline lighting system,
Change Description:
feeder circuit or branch circuit supplying a sign, outline
Page 123 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
lighting system, or skeleton tubing shall be controlled by an
externally operable switch or circuit breaker that opens all
ungrounded conductors and controls no other load. The
switch or circuit breaker shall open all ungrounded conductors simultaneously on multi-wire branch circuits in accordance with 210.4(B). Signs and outline lighting systems
located within fountains shall have the disconnect located
in accordance with 680.12.
(A) Location.
(1) At Point of Entry to a Sign Enclosure. The disconnect shall be located at the point the feeder circuit or branch
circuit(s) supplying a sign or outline lighting system enters
a sign enclosure or a pole in accordance with 600.5(C)(3)
and shall disconnect all wiring where it enters the enclosure
of the sign or pole.
Exception: A disconnect shall not be required for branch
or feeder circuits passing through the sign where enclosed
in a Chapter 3 listed raceway.
(12) Within Sight of the Sign. The disconnecting means
shall be within sight of the sign or outline lighting system
that it controls. Where the disconnecting means is out of
the line of sight from any section that is able to be energized, the disconnecting means shall be capable of being
locked in the open position. lockable in accordance with
110.25. The provision for locking or adding a lock to the
disconnecting means must remain in place at the switch or
circuit breaker whether the lock is installed or not. Portable
means for adding a lock to the switch or circuit breaker
shall not be permitted.
(23) Within Sight of the Controller. The following shall
apply for signs or outline lighting systems operated by electronic or electromechanical controllers located external to
the sign or outline lighting system:
Added a requirement for a sign disconnecting means to be
installed at the supply circuit point of entry.
Removed lockable disconnecting means requirements repeated
throughout the code and replaced with a reference to Section
110.25, covering these requirements generically. Editorial
change, simplifying use of the NEC.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) The disconnecting means shall be permitted to be located within sight of the controller or in the same enclosure with the controller.
(2) The disconnecting means shall disconnect the sign or
Page 124 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
outline lighting system and the controller from all ungrounded supply conductors.
(3) The disconnecting means shall be designed such that
no pole can be operated independently and shall be
capable of being locked in the open position. lockable
in accordance with 110.25.The provisions for locking
or adding a lock to the disconnecting means must remain in place at the switch or circuit breaker whether
the lock is installed or not. Portable means for adding a
lock to the switch or circuit breaker shall not be
permitted.
600.21 Ballasts, Transformers, Electronic Power Supplies, and Electronic Class 2 Power Supplies.Sources.
Ballasts, transformers, electronic power supplies, and Class
2 power sources shall be of the self-contained type or be
enclosed by placement in a listed sign body or listed separate enclosure.
(A) Accessibility. Ballasts, transformers, electronic power
supplies, and electronic Class 2 power suppliessources shall
be located where accessible and shall be securely fastened
in place.
(B) Location. Ballasts, transformers, electronic power supplies, and electronic Class 2 power suppliessources shall be
installed as near to the lamps or neon tubing as practicable
to keep the secondary conductors as short as possible.
(C) Wet Location. Ballasts, transformers, electronic
power supplies, and electronic Class 2 power supplies
sources used in wet locations shall be of the weatherproof
type or be of the outdoor type and protected from the
weather by placement in a sign body or separate enclosure.
(D) Working Space. A working space at least 900 mm
(3 ft) high,high × 900 mm (3 ft) wide, bywide × 900 mm
(3 ft) deep shall be provided at each ballast, transformer,
electronic power supply, and electronic Class 2 power
supplysource or at its enclosure where not installed in a
sign.
Change Description:
Added Class 2 power supplies which are used in LED sign, to
ensure that the installation requirements are applied to these
power supply sources.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 125 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(E) Attic and Soffit Locations. Ballasts, transformers,
electronic power supplies, and electronic Class 2 power
suppliessources shall be permitted to be located in attics
and soffits, provided there is an access door at least 900 mm
by× 562.5 mm (36 in. by× 221⁄2 in.) and a passageway of at
least 900 mm (3 ft) high by× 600 mm (2 ft) wide with a
suitable permanent walkway at least 300 mm (12 in.) wide
extending from the point of entry to each component. At
least one lighting outlet containing a switch or controlled
by a wall switch shall be installed in such spaces. At least
one point of control shall be at the usual point of entry to
these spaces. The lighting outlet shall be provided at or
near the equipment requiring servicing.
(F) Suspended Ceilings. Ballasts, transformers, electronic
power supplies, and electronic Class 2 power supplies
sources shall be permitted to be located above suspended
ceilings, provided that their enclosures are securely fastened in place and not dependent on the suspended-ceiling
grid for support. Ballasts, transformers, and electronic
power supplies installed in suspended ceilings shall not be
connected to the branch circuit by flexible cord.
600.32 Neon Secondary-Circuit Wiring, over 1000
Volts, Nominal
(A) Wiring Methods.
(1) Installation. Conductors shall be installed in rigid
metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, PVC conduit,
RTRC, liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit, flexible
metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit, electrical
metallic tubing, metal enclosures; on insulators in metal
raceways; or in other equipment listed for use with neon
secondary circuits over 1000 volts.
Change Description:
Removed PVC and RTRC conduits from the list of acceptable
wiring methods for neon secondary –circuit wiring over 1000 V,
which were inadvertently inserted in the 2008 version.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 605
Office Furnishings(Consisting of Lighting
Accessories and Wired Partitions)
605.5605.6 Lighting Accessories. Lighting equipment
Change Description:
shall be listed and identified for use with wired partitions
Modified language of this article and added clarifications
Page 126 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
office furnishings and shall comply with 605.5(A)605.6(A),
(B), and (C).
(B) Connection. Where cord and plug connection is provided, it shall comply with all of the following:
(1) theThe cord length shall be suitable for the intended
application but shall not exceed 2.7 m (9 ft) in length.
(2) The cord shall not be smaller than 18 AWG, AWG.
(3) The cord shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, andexcept as specified in 605.6(B)(4).
(4) Cords on the load side of a listed Class 2 power source
shall not be required to contain an equipment grounding
conductor.
(5) The cord shall be of the hard usage type, except as
specified in 605.6(B)(6).
(6) A cord provided on a listed Class 2 power source shall
be of the type provided with the listed luminaire assembly or
of the type specified in 725.130 and 725.127.
610.31 Runway Conductor Disconnecting Means. A disconnecting means that has a continuous ampere rating not
less than that calculated in 610.14(E) and (F) shall be provided between the runway contact conductors and the
power supply. SuchThe disconnecting means shall consist
of a motor-circuit switch, circuit breaker, or molded-case
switch.comply with 430.109. This disconnecting means
shall be as follows:
(1) Readily accessible and operable from the ground or
floor level
(2) Capable of being locked in the open position. The provision for locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting
means shall be installed on or at the switch or circuit
breaker used as the disconnecting means and shall remain in place with or without the lock installed. Por
table means for adding a lock to the switch or circuit
breaker shall not be permitted as the means required to
regarding application of Class 2 power sources in office
furnishings.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 610
Cranes and Hoists
Change Description:
Removed lockable disconnecting means requirements repeated
throughout the code and replaced with a reference to Section
110.25, covering these requirements generically. In addition,
referred to 430.109 for supplemental requirements. Included
exception addressing disconnecting means for electrolytic cell
lines.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 127 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
be installed at and remain with the equipment.Lockable
open in accordance with 110.25
Exception: The runway conductor disconnecting means
for electrolytic cell lines shall be permitted to be placed out
of view of the runway contact conductors where either of
the following conditions are met:
(1) Where a location in view of the contact conductors is
impracticable or introduces additional or increased
hazards to persons or property
(2) In industrial installations, with written safety procedures, where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the
equipment
ARTICLE 620
Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, Moving Walks, Platform Lifts, and Stairway Chairlifts
620.21 Wiring Methods. Conductors and optical fibers loChange Description:
cated in hoistways, in escalator and moving walk wellways,
Added exception for cords and cables allowing their installation
in platform lifts, stairway chairlift runways, machinery
without a raceway, recognizing that some equipment utilized in
spaces, control spaces, in or on cars, in machine rooms and
hoistways, moving walkways, etc. use cords for power supply
control rooms, not including the traveling cables connect(computer displays, power supplies, etc.). The wiring typically
ing the car or counterweight and hoistway wiring, shall be
installed in rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit,
applied for this type of equipment is not meant to be installed in
electrical metallic tubing, rigid nonmetallic conduit, or
raceways.
wireways, or shall be Type MC, MI, or AC cable unless
otherwise permitted in 620.21(A) through (C).
Exception: Cords and cables of listed cord- and plugconnected equipment shall not be required to be installed in
a raceway.
620.22 Branch Circuits for Car Lighting, Receptacle(s),
Ventilation, Heating, and Air-Conditioning.
(B) Air-Conditioning and Heating Source. A dedicatedseparate branch circuit shall supply the air-conditioning and
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact. Revised to correlate this section with NFPA
33 and 34.
Change Description:
Editorial change clarifying language.
Page 128 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
heating units on each elevator car. The overcurrent device
protecting the branch circuit shall be located in the elevator
machine room or control room/machinery space or control
space.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
620.41 Suspension of Traveling Cables. Traveling cables
shall be suspended at the car and hoistways’ ends, or counterweight end where applicable, so as to reduce the strain
on the individual copper conductors to a minimum.
Traveling cables shall be supported by one of the following means:
(1) By their steel supporting member(s)
(2) By looping the cables around supports for unsupported
lengths less than 30 m (100 ft)
(3) By suspending from the supports by a means that automatically tightens around the cable when tension is
increased for unsupported lengths up to 60 m (200 ft)
Informational Note: Unsupported length for the hoistway suspension means is shall be that length of cable as
measured from the point of suspension in the hoistway to
the bottom of the loop, with the elevator car located at the
bottom landing. Unsupported length for the car suspension
means is shall be that length of cable as measured from the
point of suspension on the car to the bottom of the loop,
with the elevator car located at the top landing.
Change Description:
Converted the text of the Informational Note to 620.41 into
620.41 as permissive language to clarify the intent of this section.
620.62 Selective Coordination. Where more than one
driving machine disconnecting means is supplied by a
single feeder, the overcurrent protective devices in each
disconnecting means shall be selectively coordinated with
any other supply side overcurrent protective devices.
Selective coordination shall be selected by a licensed
professional engineer or other qualified person engaged primarily in the design, installation, or maintenance of electri-
Change Description:
Added a requirement to have selective coordination developed by
a licensed professional engineer or other qualified person and be
made available to AHJ.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No safety impact. May have an impact on design agencies to
Page 129 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
cal systems. The selection shall be documented and made
available to those authorized to design, install, inspect,
maintain, and operate the system.
have documentation from licensed professional engineer to meet
the requirement.
ARTICLE 625
Electric Vehicle Charging System
625.4 Voltages. Unless other voltages are specified, the
Change Description:
nominal ac system voltages of 120, 120/240, 208Y/120,
Revised to include dc system voltage criteria for supply
240, 480Y/277, 480, 600Y/347, and 600 volts and dc sysequipment covered by Article 625.
tem voltages of up to 600 volts shall be used to supply
equipment covered by this article.
625.17 Cable.Cords and Cables. The electric vehicle supply equipment cable shall be Type EV, EVJ, EVE, EVJE,
EVT, or EVJT flexible cable as specified in Article 400 and
Table 400.4. Ampacities shall be as specified in Table
400.5(A)(1) for 10 AWG and smaller, and in Table
400.5(A)(2) for 8 AWG and larger. The overall length of
the cable shall not exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) unless equipped
with a cable management system that is listed as suitable
for the purpose. Other cable types and assemblies listed as
being suitable for the purpose, including optional hybrid
communications, signal, and composite optical fiber cables,
shall be permitted.
(A) Power-Supply Cord. The cable for cord-connected
equipment shall comply with all of the following:
(1) Be any of the types specified in 625.17(B) or hard
service cord, junior hard service cord, or portable
power cable types in accordance with Table 400.4.
Hard service cord, junior hard service cord, or portable
power cable types shall be listed, as applicable, for
exposure to oil and damp and wet locations.
(2) Have an ampacity as specified in Table 400.5(A)(1) or,
for 8 AWG and larger, in the 60°C columns of Table
400.5(A)(2).
(3) Have an overall length as specified in 625.17(A)(3)a or
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 130 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
b as follows:
a. When the interrupting device of the personnel protection system specified in 625.22 is located within
the enclosure of the supply equipment or charging
system, the power-supply cord shall be not more
than 300 mm (12 in.) long,
b. When the interrupting device of the personnel protection system specified in 625.22 is located at the
attachment plug, or within the first 300 mm (12 in.)
of the power-supply cord, the overall cord length
shall be a minimum of 1.8 m (6 ft) and shall be not
greater than 4.6 m (15 ft).
(B) Output Cable to the Electric Vehicle. The output
cable to the electric vehicle shall be Type EV, EVJ, EVE,
EVJE, EVT, or EVJT flexible cable as specified in Table
400.4.
(C) Overall Cord and Cable Length. The overall usable
length shall not exceed 7.5 m (25 ft) unless equipped with
a cable management system that is part of the listed electric
vehicle supply equipment.
(1) Not Fastened in Place. Where the electric vehicle supply equipment or charging system is not fastened in place,
the cord-exposed usable length shall be measured from the
face of the attachment plug to the face of the electric vehicle connector.
(2) Fastened in Place. Where the electric vehicle supply
equipment or charging system is fastened in place, the usable length of the output cable shall be measured from the
cable exit of the electric vehicle supply equipment or charging system to the face of the electric vehicle connector.
625.18 Interlock. Electric vehicle supply equipment shall
be provided with an interlock that de-energizes the electric
vehicle connector and its cable whenever the electrical connector is uncoupled from the electric vehicle. An interlock
shall not be required for portable cord-and-plug-connected
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
Page 131 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
electric vehicle supply equipment intended for connection
to receptacle outlets rated at 125 volts, single phase, 15 and
20 amperes. An interlock shall not be required for dc supplies less than 50 volts dc.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
625.19 Automatic De-Energization of Cable. The electric vehicle supply equipment or the cable-connector combination of the equipment shall be provided with an automatic means to de-energize the cable conductors and
electric vehicle connector upon exposure to strain that
could result in either cable rupture or separation of the
cable from the electric connector and exposure of live parts.
Automatic means to de-energize the cable conductors and
electric vehicle connector shall not be required for portable
cord-and-plug-connected electric vehicle supply equipment
intended for connection to receptacle outlets rated at
125 volts, single phase, 15 and 20 amperes. An interlock
shall not be required for dc supplies less than 50 volts dc.
Change Description:
This change eliminates a need for an interlock for dc supplies
less than 50 V dc.
625.14625.41 Rating. Electric vehicle supply equipment
shall have sufficient rating to supply the load served. For
Electric vehicle charging loads shall be considered to be
continuous loads for the purposes of this article. Where an
automatic load management system is used, the maximum
electric vehicle charging loads supply equipment load on a
service and feeder shall be considered to be continuous
loads.the maximum load permitted by the automatic load
management system.
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
625.44 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment Connection.
Electric vehicle supply equipment shall be permitted to be
cord- and plug-connected to the premises wiring system in
accordance with one of the following:
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
(A) Connections to 125-Volt, Single-Phase, 15- and
20-Ampere Receptacle Outlets. Electric vehicle supply
equipment intended for connection to nonlocking, 2-pole,
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 132 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
2-wire grounding-type receptacle outlets rated at 125 V,
single phase, 15 and 20 amperes or from a supply of less
than 50 volts dc.
(B) Connections to Other Receptacle Outlets. Electric
vehicle supply equipment that is rated 250 V maximum and
complying with all of the following:
(1) It is intended for connection to nonlocking, 2-pole,
3-wire and 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding-type receptacle
outlets rated not more than 50 amperes.
(2) EVSE is fastened in place to facilitate any of the following:
a. Ready removal for interchange
b. Facilitation of maintenance and repair
c. Repositioning of portable, movable, or EVSE fas- tened
in place
(3) Power-supply cord length for electric vehicle supply
equipment fastened in place is limited to 1.8 m (6 ft).
(4) Receptacles are located to avoid physical damage to the
flexible cord.
All other electric vehicle supply equipment shall be permanently wired and fastened in place to the supporting
surface, a wall, a pole, or other structure. The electric vehicle supply equipment shall have no exposed live parts.
(A)625.50Location. The electric vehicle supply equipment
shall be located to permit for direct connection electrical
coupling of the EV connector (conductive or inductive) to
the electric vehicle. Unless specifically listed and marked
for the location, the coupling means of the electric vehicle
supply equipment shall be stored or located at a height of
not less than 450 mm (18 in.) above the floor level for
indoor locations and 600 mm (24 in.) above the grade level
for outdoor locations.
(B) Height. Unless specifically listed for the purpose and
location, the coupling means of the electric vehicle supply
equipment shall be stored or located at a height of not less
than 450 mm (18 in.) and not more than 1.2 m (4 ft) above
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 133 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
the floor level.
625.52 Ventilation. The ventilation requirement for charging an electric vehicle in an indoor enclosed space shall be
determined by 625.52(A) or (B).
(DB) Ventilation Required. Where the electric vehicle
supply equipment is listed or labeled as suitable for charging electric vehicles that require ventilation for indoor
charging, and is marked in accordance with 625.15(C), mechanical ventilation, such as a fan, shall be provided. The
ventilation shall include both supply and exhaust equipment and shall be permanently installed and located to intake from, and vent directly to, the outdoors. Positivepressure ventilation systems shall be permitted only in
vehicle charging buildings or areas that have been specifically designed and approved for that application. Mechanical ventilation requirements shall be determined by one of
the methods specified in 625.29(D)625.52(B)(1) through
(DB)(4).
(4) Supply Circuits. The supply circuit to the mechanical
ventilation equipment shall be electrically interlocked with
the electric vehicle supply equipment and shall remain energized during the entire electric vehicle charging cycle.
Electric vehicle supply equipment shall be marked in accordance with 625.15. Electric vehicle supply equipment
receptacles rated at 125 volts, single phase, 15 and 20 amperes shall be marked in accordance with 625.15(C)625.15
and shall be switched, and the mechanical ventilation system shall be electrically interlocked through the switch supply power to the receptacle. Electric vehicle supply equipment supplied from less than 50 volts dc shall be marked in
accordance with 625.15(C) and shall be switched, and the
mechanical ventilation system shall be electrically interlocked through the switch supply power to the electric vehicle supply
625.30 Outdoor Sites. Outdoor sites shall include but not
be limited to residential carports and driveways, curbside,
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
article into three parts. The changes also address evolving EV
technology.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Part of the renumbering of sections and reorganization of this
Page 134 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
open parking structures, parking lots, and commercial
charging facilities.
(A) Location. The electric vehicle supply equipment shall
be located to permit direct connection to the electric vehicle.
article into three parts.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Height. Unless specifically listed for the purpose and
location, the coupling means of electric vehicle supply
equipment shall be stored or located at a height of not less
than 600 mm (24 in.) and not more than 1.2 m (4 ft) above
the parking surface.
ARTICLE 645
Information Technology Equipment
645.4 Special Requirements for Information TechnolChange Description:
ogy Equipment Room. This article shall be permitted to
Section rewritten for better clarity.
provide alternate wiring methods to the provisions of Chapters 1 through 4 Chapter 3 and Article 708 for power wirImpact(s) :
ing, 725.154Parts I and III of Article 725 for signaling
No negative impact.
wiring, and 770.113(C) Parts I and Table 770.154(a) Vof
Article 770 for optical fiber cabling whenwhere all of the
Article 770 for optical fiber cabling whenwhere all of the
following conditions are met:
(1) Disconnecting means complying with 645.10 are provided.
(2) A separate heating/ventilating/air-conditioning (HVAC
system is provided in one of the methods identified in
645.4(2) a or b.
a. A separate HVAC system that is dedicated for information technology equipment use and is
separated from other areas of occupancy.;or
b. Any HVAC system that serves other occupancies
and meets all of the following:
i. shall be permitted to also serve Also serves the
information technology equipment room if
ii. Provides fire/smoke dampers are provided at the
Page 135 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
point of penetration of the room boundary.
boundary
iii. Such dampers shall operate on activation of Activates the damper operation upon initiation by
smoke detectors anddetector alarms, by operation of
the disconnecting means required by 645.10. , or
by both
645.5 Supply Circuits and Interconnecting Cables.
(E) Under Raised Floors. Power cables, communications
cables, connecting cables, interconnecting cables, cord-andplug connections, and receptacles associated with the information technology equipment shall be permitted under a
raised floor, provided the following conditions are met:
(4) Ventilation in the underfloor area is used for the information technology equipment room only, except as
provided in 645.4(2). The ventilation system shall be so
arranged, with approved smoke detection devices, that upon
the detection of fire or products of combustion in the
underfloor space, the circulation of air will cease.
6) Cables, other than those covered in 645.5(E)(2) and (E)(3),
and those complying with (E)(6)(a) or (E)(6)(b), shall be
listed as Type DP cable having adequate fire- resistant
characteristics suitable for use under raised floors of an
information technology equipment room. are one of the
following:
Change Description:
Section rewritten for better clarity.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
a. Listed Type DP cable having adequate fire-resistant
characteristics suitable for use under raised floors of an
information technology equipment room
a. b. Interconnecting cables enclosed in a raceway
b. c. Cable type designations shown in Table 645.5
645.5(E)(6) shall be permitted. Green, or green with one or
more yellow stripes, insulated single- conductor cables, 4
AWG and larger, marked “for use in cable trays” or “for
CT use” shall be permitted for equipment grounding.
d. Equipment grounding conductors
Page 136 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
645.14 System Grounding. Separately derived power systems shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of
Parts I and II of Article 250. Power systems derived within
listed information technology equipment that supply information technology systems through receptacles or cable assemblies supplied as part of this equipment shall not be
considered separately derived for the purpose of applying
250.30
Change Description:
This revision divides the grounding requirements into two
different sections: one for equipment grounding and bonding, and
one for system grounding.
645.15 Grounding.Equipment Grounding and Bonding.
All exposed non–current-carrying metal parts of an information technology system shall be bonded to the equipment
grounding conductor in accordance with Parts I, V, VI, VII,
and VIII of Article 250 or shall be double insulated. Power
systems derived within listed information technology
equipment that supply information technology systems
through receptacles or cable assemblies supplied as part of
this equipment shall not be considered separately derived
for the purpose of applying 250.30. Where signal reference
structures are installed, they shall be bonded to the equipment grounding conductor provided for the information
technology equipment. Any auxiliary grounding electrode(s) installed for information technology equipment
shall be installed in accordance with 250.54.
Change Description:
This revision divides the grounding requirements into two
different sections: one for equipment grounding and bonding, and
one for system grounding.
645.27 Selective Coordination. Critical operations data
system(s) overcurrent protective devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply-side overcurrent protective devices.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for a selective coordination of overcurrent
protection devices in power supply systems of critical operations
data systems.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 646
Modular Data Center
Page 137 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Added a new Article. The text of this new
article not included for brevity.
Change Description:
Added a new article addressing requirements for modular data
centers.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 650
Pipe Organs
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 675
Electrically Driven or Controlled Irrigation Machines
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 680
Swimming Pools, Fountains, and Similar Installations
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
ARTICLE 690
Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Systems
690.4 Installation.General Requirements.
Change Description:
A) Photovoltaic Systems. Photovoltaic systems shall be
Article 690 was rearranged in this edition of the code. Portions of
permitted to supply a building or other structure in addition
Section 690.4 were moved to Section 690.31. Also, added a
to any other electricityelectrical supply system(s).
subsection requiring that the personnel installing PV systems
(B) Identification and Grouping. Photovoltaic source cirshall be qualified.
cuits and PV output circuits shall not be contained in the
same raceway, cable tray, cable, outlet box, junction box, or
similar fitting as conductors, feeders, or branch circuits of
other non-PV systems, unless the conductors of the different systems are separated by a partition. Photovoltaic system conductors shall be identified and grouped as required
by 690.4(B)(1) through (4). The means of identification
shall be permitted by separate color coding, marking tape,
tagging, or other approved means.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) Photovoltaic Source Circuits. Photovoltaic source circuits shall be identified at all points of termination, connection, and splices.
Page 138 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(2) Photovoltaic Output and Inverter Circuits. The conductors of PV output circuits and inverter input and output
circuits shall be identified at all points of termination, connection, and splices.
(3) Conductors of Multiple Systems. Where the conductors of more than one PV system occupy the same junction
box, raceway, or equipment, the conductors of each system
shall be identified at all termination, connection, and splice
points.
Exception: Where the identification of the conductors is
evident by spacing or arrangement, further identification is
not required.
(4) Grouping. Where the conductors of more than one PV
system occupy the same junction box or raceway with a
removable cover(s), the ac and dc conductors of each system shall be grouped separately by wire ties or similar
means at least once, and then shall be grouped at intervals
not to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft).
Exception: The requirement for grouping shall not apply if
the circuit enters from a cable or raceway unique to the
circuit that makes the grouping obvious.
(C) Module Connection Arrangement. The connection to
a module or panel shall be arranged so that removal of a
module or panel from a photovoltaic source circuit does not
interrupt a grounded conductor to other PV source circuits.
(DB) Equipment. Inverters, motor generators, photovoltaicPV modules, photovoltaicPV panels, ac photovoltaicPV
modules, source-circuitdc combiners, dc-to-dc converters,
and charge controllers intended for use in photovoltaicPV
power systems shall be identified and listed for the PV
application.
(E) Wiring and Connections. The equipment and systems
in 690.4(A) through (D) and all associated wiring and interconnections shall be installed only by qualified persons.
Informational Note: See Article 100 for the definition of
qualified person.
Page 139 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(F) Circuit Routing. Photovoltaic source and PV output
conductors, in and out of conduit, and inside of a building
or structure, shall be routed along building structural members such as beams, rafters, trusses, and columns where the
location of those structural members can be determined by
observation. Where circuits are imbedded in built-up, laminate, or membrane roofing materials in roof areas not covered by PV modules and associated equipment, the location
of circuits shall be clearly marked.
(G) Bipolar Photovoltaic Systems. Where the sum, without consideration of polarity, of the PV system voltages of
the two monopole subarrays exceeds the rating of the conductors and connected equipment, monopole subarrays in a
bipolar PV system shall be physically separated, and the
electrical output circuits from each monopole subarray
shall be installed in separate raceways until connected to
the inverter. The disconnecting means and overcurrent protective devices for each monopole subarray output shall be
in separate enclosures. All conductors from each separate
monopole subarray shall be routed in the same raceway.
Exception: Listed switchgear rated for the maximum voltage between circuits and containing a physical barrier
separating the disconnecting means for each monopole
subarray shall be permitted to be used instead of disconnecting means in separate enclosures.
(C) Qualified Personnel. The installation of equipment
and all associated wiring and interconnections shall be performed only by qualified persons.
690.5 Ground-Fault Protection. Grounded dc photovoltaicPV arrays shall be provided with dc ground-fault protection meeting the requirements of 690.5(A) through (C) to
reduce fire hazards. Ungrounded dc photovoltaicPV arrays
shall comply with 690.35.
Change Description:
Exception 2 was deleted because research and actual fires due
to ground faults indicated that oversizing the equipmentgrounding conductors in lieu of providing a ground fault protection
Page 140 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Exception No. 2: Photovoltaic arrays installed at other
than dwelling units shall be permitted without ground-fault
protection if each equipment grounding conductor is sized
in accordance with 690.45.
(A) Ground-Fault Detection and Interruption. The
ground fault protection device or system shall:
1) beBe capable of detecting a ground-fault current,
ground fault in the PV array dc current-carrying conductors and components, including any intentionally
grounded conductors,
(2) interruptingInterrupt the flow of fault current, and current
(3) providingProvide an indication of the fault.fault, and
(4) Be listed for providing PV ground-fault protection
Automatically opening the grounded conductor of the
faulted circuitfor measurement purposes or to interrupt the
ground-fault current path shall be permitted. If a grounded
conductor is opened to interrupt the ground-fault current
path, all conductors of the faulted circuit shall be automatically and simultaneously opened.
Manual operation of the main PV dc disconnect shall not
activate the ground-fault protection device or result in
grounded conductors becoming ungrounded.
would not reduce the potential for fire. Also, expanded the text to
better define ground-fault detection requirements.
690.6 Alternating-Current (ac) Modules.
(D) Ground-Fault Detection. Alternating-current module
systems shall be permitted to use a single detection device
to detect only ac ground faults and to disable the array by
removing ac power to the ac module(s).
Change Description:
The text was deleted because there is no readily available
equipment that can perform this function. There are no exposed
receptacles connected to this system and ground fault detection
is not necessary.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Reworded and reorganized section to better define the
requirements and to clarify expectations.
690.8 Circuit Sizing and Current.
(A) Calculation of Maximum Circuit Current. The
maximum current for the specific circuit shall be calculated in
accordance with 690.8(A)(1) through (A)(45).
(5) DC-to-DC Converter Output Current. The maxi-
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 141 of 203
2
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
mum current shall be the dc-to-dc converter continuous
output current rating.
(B) Ampacity and Overcurrent Device Ratings.Conductor Ampacity. PhotovoltaicPV system currents shall be
considered to be continuous.(2) Conductor Ampacity. Circuit conductors shall be sized to carry not less than the
larger of 690.8(B)(2)(a)690.8(B)(1) or (2)(b). (2).
(1) Overcurrent Devices. Overcurrent devices, where required, shall be rated as required by 690.8(B)(1)(a) through
(1)(d).
(a) To carry not less than 125 percent of the maximum
currents calculated in 690.8(A).
(a)(1) One hundred and twenty-five percent of the maximum currents calculated in 690.8(A) without any additional
correction factors for conditions of use. before the application of adjustment and correction factors.
(b) Terminal temperature limits shall be in accordance with
110.3(B) and 110.14(C).
(c) Where operated at temperatures greater than 40°C
(104°F), the manufacturer’s temperature correction factors
shall apply.
(d) The rating or setting of overcurrent devices shall be
permitted in accordance with 240.4(B), (C), and (D).
b)(2) The maximum currents calculated in 690.8(A) after
conditions of use have been applied.application of adjustment and correction factors.
(c) The conductor selected, after application of conditions of use, shall be protected by the overcurrent protective
device, where required.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
690.9 Overcurrent Protection.
(A) Circuits and Equipment. PhotovoltaicPV source circuit, photovoltaicPV output circuit, inverter output circuit,
and storage battery circuit conductors and equipment shall
be protected in accordance with the requirements of Article
240. Protection devices for PV source circuits and PV output circuits shall be in accordance with the requirements of
690.9(B) through (E). Circuits, either ac or dc, connected to
Change Description:
This section was revised for clarity. Also, language was added to
insure that listed equipment be used to provide overcurrent
protection.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 142 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
more than one electrical source shall have overcurrent devices located so as current-limited supplies (e.g., PV modules ac output of utility-interactive inverters) and also connected to provide overcurrent protection from all
sources.sources having significantly higher current availability (e.g., parallel strings of modules, utility power),
shall be protected at the source from overcurrent.
B) Overcurrent Device Ratings. Overcurrent device ratings shall be not less than 125 percent of the maximum
currents calculated in 690.8(A).
Exception: Circuits containing an assembly, together with
its overcurrent device(s), that is listed for continuous operation at 100 percent of its rating shall be permitted to be
used at 100 percent of its rating.
CD) Photovoltaic Source and Output Circuits. Branchcircuit or supplementary-type Listed PV overcurrent devices shall be permittedrequired to provide overcurrent protection in photovoltaicPV source and output circuits. The
overcurrent devices shall be accessible but shall not be
required to be readily accessible.
Standard values of supplementary overcurrent devices
allowed by this section shall be in one ampere size increments, starting at one ampere up to and including 15 amperes. Higher standard values above 15 amperes for supplementary overcurrent devices shall be based on the standard
sizes provided in 240.6(A).
E) Series Overcurrent Protection. In grounded PV
source circuits, a single overcurrent protection device,
where required, shall be permitted to protect the PV modules and the interconnecting conductors. In ungrounded PV
source circuits complying with 690.35, an overcurrent protection device, where required, shall be installed in each
ungrounded circuit conductor and shall be permitted to protect the PV modules and the interconnecting cables.
690.11 Arc-Fault Circuit Protection (Direct Current).
Photovoltaic systems with dc source circuits, dc output circuits, or both, on or penetrating a building operating at a
Change Description:
This section was revised for clarity. Also, prescriptive methods
were removed, thereby allowing alternate methods.
Page 143 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
PV system maximum system voltage of 80 volts or greater,
shall be protected by a listed (dc) arc-fault circuit interrupter, PV type, or other system components listed to provide equivalent protection. The PV arc-fault protection
means shall comply with the following requirements:
(1) The system shall detect and interrupt arcing faults resulting from a failure in the intended continuity of a
conductor, connection, module, or other system component
in the dc PV source and dc PV output circuits.
2) The system shall disable or disconnect one of the following:
a. Inverters or charge controllers connected to the fault circuit
when the fault is detected
b. System components within the arcing circuit
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
690.12 Rapid Shutdown of PV Systems on Buildings.
PV system circuits installed on or in buildings shall include
a rapid shutdown function that controls specific conductors
in accordance with 690.12(1) through (5) as follows.
(1) Requirements for controlled conductors shall apply
only to PV system conductors of more than 1.5 m (5 ft) in
length inside a building, or more than 3 m (10 ft) from a
PV array.
(2) Controlled conductors shall be limited to not more than
30 volts and 240 volt-amperes within 10 seconds of
rapid shutdown initiation.
(3) Voltage and power shall be measured between any two
conductors and between any conductor and ground.
(4) The rapid shutdown initiation methods shall be labeled
in accordance with 690.56(B).
(5) Equipment that performs the rapid shutdown shall be
listed and identified.
Change Description:
This new section requires that PV systems installed on building
roofs should be equipped with rapid shutdown equipment, deenergizing specific conductors of the system within 10 seconds of
rapid shutdown initiation to minimize hazards to firefighters.
690.13 All Conductors.Building or Other Structure
Supplied by a Photovoltaic System. Means shall be provided to disconnect all current-carryingungrounded dc conductors of a photovoltaicPV system from all other conduc-
Change Description:
Section 690.13 was reorganized and rewritten to address various
wiring methods previously covered in 690.4 and 690.14 and to
improve clarity. Also, moved disconnect construction
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact
Page 144 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
tors in a building or other structure. A switch, circuit breaker, requirements to Section 690.17.
or other device shall not be installed in a grounded conductor
if operation of that switch, circuit breaker, or other device
leaves the marked, grounded conductor in an ungrounded and Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
energized state.
Exception No. 1: A switch or circuit breaker that is part of a
ground-fault detection system required by 690.5, or that is
part of an arc-fault detection/interruption system re- quired
by 690.11, shall be permitted to open the grounded
conductor when that switch or circuit breaker is automatically opened as a normal function of the device in responding to ground faults.
Exception No. 2: A disconnecting switch shall be permitted in a grounded conductor if all of the following conditions are met:
(1) The switch is used only for PV array maintenance.
(2) The switch is accessible only by qualified persons.
(3) The switch is rated for the maximum dc voltage and
current that could be present during any operation,
including ground-fault conditions.
690.14 Additional Provisions. Photovoltaic disconnecting
means shall comply with 690.14(A) through (D).
(A) Disconnecting Means. The disconnecting means shall
not be required to be suitable as service equipment and
shall comply with 690.17.
(B) Equipment. Equipment such as photovoltaic source
circuit isolating switches, overcurrent devices, and blocking
diodes shall be permitted on the photovoltaic side of the
photovoltaic disconnecting means.
(C) Requirements for Disconnecting Means. Means
shall be provided to disconnect all conductors in a building
or other structure from the photovoltaic system conductors.
(3C) Suitable for Use. Each photovoltaicPV system disconnecting means shall not be suitable for the prevailing
Page 145 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
conditions. required to be suitable as service equipment.
Equipment installed in hazardous (classified) locations shall
comply with the requirements of Articles 500 through 517.
690.15 Disconnection of Photovoltaic Equipment.
Means shall be provided to disconnect equipment, such as
inverters, batteries, charge controllers, and the like,charge
controllers, from all ungrounded conductors of all sources.
If the equipment is energized from more than one source,
the disconnecting means shall be grouped and identified.
A single disconnecting means in accordance with
690.17 shall be permitted for the combined ac output of one
or more inverters or ac modules in an interactive system.
(B) Equipment. Equipment such as PV source circuit isolating switches, overcurrent devices, dc-to-dc converters,
and blocking diodes shall be permitted on the PV side of
the PV disconnecting means.
(C) Direct-Current Combiner Disconnects. The dc output of dc combiners mounted on roofs of dwellings or other
buildings shall have a load break disconnecting means located in the combiner or w i t h i n 1.8 m (6 ft) of the
com- biner. The disconnecting means shall be permitted to
be remotely controlled but shall be manually operable
locally when control power is not available.
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and adding
disconnect requirements, aimed at improving firefighters safety in
case of an emergency.
690.17 Switch or Circuit Breaker.Disconnect Type.
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and including
disconnect requirements, previously covered in other sections of
this article.
(A) Manually Operable. The disconnecting means for ungrounded PV conductors shall consist of a manually operable switch(es) or circuit breaker(s) breaker(s). The disconnecting means shall be permitted to be power operable with
provisions for manual operation in the event of a powersupply failure. complying with all of the following requirements: The disconnecting means shall be one of the following listed devices:
(1) Located where readily accessibleA PV industrial control switch marked for use in PV systems
(2) Externally operable without exposing the operator to
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 146 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
contact with live partsA PV molded-case circuit
breaker marked for use in PV systems
(3) Plainly indicating whether in the open or closed positionA PV molded-case switch marked for use in PV
systems
(4) Having an interrupting rating sufficient for the nominal circuit voltage and the current that is available at
the line terminals of the equipmentA PV enclosed
switch marked for use in PV systems
(5) A PV open-type switch marked for use in PV systems
(6) A dc-rated molded-case circuit breaker suitable for
backfeed operation
(7) A dc-rated molded-case switch suitable for backfeed
operation
(8) A dc-rated enclosed switch
(9) A dc-rated open-type switch
(10) A dc-rated rated low-voltage power circuit breaker
Where all terminals of the disconnecting means may be
energized in the open position, a warning sign shall be
ounted on or adjacent to the disconnecting means. The
sign shall be clearly legible and have the following words
or equivalent:
(B) Simultaneous Opening of Poles. The PV disconnecting means shall simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded
supply conductors.
C) Externally Operable and Indicating. The PV disconnecting means shall be externally operable without exposing the operator to contact with live parts and shall indicate
whether in the open or closed position.
(D) Disconnection of Grounded Conductor. A switch,
circuit breaker, or other device shall not be installed in a
grounded conductor if operation of that switch, circuit
breaker, or other device leaves the marked, grounded conductor in an ungrounded and energized state.
Exception No. 1: A switch or circuit breaker that is part of
a ground-fault detection system required by 690.5, or that
Page 147 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
is part of an arc-fault detection/interruption system required by 690.11, shall be permitted to open the grounded
conductor when that switch or circuit breaker is automatically opened as a normal function of the device in responding to ground faults.
Exception No. 2: A disconnecting switch shall be permitted in a grounded conductor if all of the following conditions are met:
(1) The switch is used only for PV array maintenance.
(2) The switch is accessible only by qualified persons.
(3) The switch is rated for the maximum dc voltage and
current that could be present during any operation,
including ground-fault conditions.
(E) Interrupting Rating. The building or structure disconnecting means shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the maximum circuit voltage and current that is
available at the line terminals of the equipment. Where all
terminals of the disconnecting means may be energized in
the open position, a warning sign shall be mounted on or
adjacent to the disconnecting means. The sign shall be
clearly legible and have the following words or equivalent:
WARNING ELECTRIC
SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT
TOUCH TERMINALS.
TERMINALS ON BOTH THE
LINE
AND LOAD SIDES MAY BE ENERGIZED IN
THE OPEN POSITION.
The warning sign(s) or label(s) shall comply with
110.21(B).
Exception: A connector shall be permitted to be used as
an ac or a dc disconnecting means, provided that it complies with the requirements of 690.33 and is listed and
identified for the use with specific equipment.
Page 148 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(A) Wiring Systems. All raceway and cable wiring methods included in this Code and , other wiring systems and
fittings specifically intended and identified listed for use on
photovoltaic arraysPV arrays, and wiring as part of a listed
system shall be permitted. Where wiring devices with integral enclosures are used, sufficient length of cable shall be
provided to facilitate replacement.
Where photovoltaicPV source and output circuits operating at maximum system voltages greater than 30 volts are
installed in readily accessible locations, circuit conductors
shall be guarded or installed in a raceway.
B) Identification and Grouping. PV source circuits and
PV output circuits shall not be contained in the same raceway, cable tray, cable, outlet box, junction box, or similar
fitting as conductors, feeders, branch circuits of other
non-PV systems, or inverter output circuits, unless the conductors of the different systems are separated by a partition.
PV system conductors shall be identified and grouped as
required by 690.31(B)(1) through (4). The means of identification shall be permitted by separate color coding, marking tape, tagging, or other approved means.
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) PV Source Circuits. PV source circuits shall be identified at all points of termination, connection, and splices.
(2) PV Output and Inverter Circuits. The conductors of
PV output circuits and inverter input and output circuits
shall be identified at all points of termination, connection,
and splices.
3) Conductors of Multiple Systems. Where the conductors of more than one PV system occupy the same junction
box, raceway, or equipment, the conductors of each system
shall be identified at all termination, connection, and splice
points.
Exception: Where the identification of the conductors is
evident by spacing or arrangement, further identification shall
not be required.
Page 149 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(4) Grouping. Where the conductors of more than one PV
system occupy the same junction box or raceway with a
removable cover(s), the ac and dc conductors of each system shall be grouped separately by cable ties or similar
means at least once and shall then be grouped at intervals
not to exceed 1.8 m (6 ft).
Exception: The requirement for grouping shall not apply if the
circuit enters from a cable or raceway unique to the circuit
that makes the grouping obvious.
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(BC) Single-Conductor Cable.
(2) Cable Tray. PV source circuits and PV output circuits
using single-conductor cable listed and labeled as photovoltaic (PV) wire of all sizes, with or without a cable tray
marking/rating, shall be permitted in cable trays installed in
outdoor locations, provided that the cables are supported
at intervals not to exceed 300 mm (12 in.) and
secured at intervals not to exceed 1.4 m (4.5 ft).
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(D) Multiconductor Cable. Multiconductor cable Type
TC-ER or Type USE-2 shall be permitted in outdoor locations in PV inverter output circuits where used with utilityinteractive inverters mounted in locations that are not
readily accessible. The cable shall be secured at intervals
not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft). Equipment grounding for the
utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment
grounding conductor within the cable.
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(EG) Direct-Current Photovoltaic Source and DirectCurrent Output Circuits on or Inside a Building. Where
dc photovoltaicPV source or dc PV output circuits from a
building-integrated systems or other photovoltaic systemPV systems are run inside a building or structure, they
shall be contained in metal raceways, Type MC metal-clad
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
Page 150 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
cable that complies with 250.118(10), or metal enclosures
from the point of penetration of the surface of the building
or structure to the first readily accessible disconnecting
means. The disconnecting means shall comply with
690.14(A)690.13(B), (B), and (C) and (D). 690.15(A) and
(B). The wiring methods shall comply with the additional
installation requirements in 690.31(G)(1) through (4).
No negative impact.
(1) Beneath Roofs.Embedded in Building Surfaces. Wiring methods shall not be installed within 25 cm (10 in.) of
the roof decking or sheathing except where directly below
the Where circuits are embedded in built-up, laminate, or
membrane roofing materials in roof surface areas not covered by PV modules and associated equipment., the location of circuits Circuits shall be run perpendicular to the
roof penetration point to supports a minimum of 25 cm
(10 in.) below the roof decking.clearly marked using a
marking protocol that is approved as being suitable for
continuous exposure to sunlight and weather.
(4) Marking and Labeling Methods and Locations. The
labels or markings shall be visible after installation. The
labels shall be reflective, and all letters shall be capitalized
and shall be a minimum height of 9.5 mm (3⁄8 in.) in white
on a red background. Photovoltaic PV power circuit labels
shall appear on every section of the wiring system that is
separated by enclosures, walls, partitions, ceilings, or
floors. Spacing between labels or markings, or between a
label and a marking, shall not be more than 3 m (10 ft).
Labels required by this section shall be suitable for the
environment where they are installed.
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(I) Bipolar Photovoltaic Systems. Where the sum, without consideration of polarity, of the PV system voltages of
the two monopole subarrays exceeds the rating of the conductors and connected equipment, monopole subarrays in a
bipolar PV system shall be physically separated, and the
electrical output circuits from each monopole subarray
shall be installed in separate raceways until connected to
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 151 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
the inverter. The disconnecting means and overcurrent protective devices for each monopole subarray output shall be
in separate enclosures. All conductors from each separate
monopole subarray shall be routed in the same raceway.
Bipolar PV systems shall be clearly marked with a permanent, legible warning notice indicating that the disconnecException: Listed switchgear rated for the maximum voltage between circuits and containing a physical barrier
separating the disconnecting means for each monopole
subarray shall be permitted to be used instead of disconnecting means in separate enclosures.
690.31 Methods Permitted.
(J) Module Connection Arrangement. The connection to
a module or panel shall be arranged so that removal of a
module or panel from a PV source circuit does not interrupt
a grounded conductor connection to other PV source circuits.
Change Description:
Part of series of changes, reorganizing Article 690 and
addressing various wiring methods, previously covered in other
sections of this article.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
690.35 Ungrounded Photovoltaic Power Systems. Photovoltaic power systems shall be permitted to operate with
ungrounded photovoltaicPV source and output circuits
where the system complies with 690.35(A) through (G).
(C) Ground-Fault Protection. All photovoltaicPV source
and output circuits shall be provided with a ground-fault
protection device or system that complies with 690.35(1)
through (3):(4):
(1) Detects a ground fault.fault(s) in the PV array dc
current-carrying conductors and components
(2) Indicates that a ground fault has occurred
(3) Automatically disconnects all conductors or causes the
inverter or charge controller connected to the faulted circuit to
automatically cease supplying power to out- put circuits.
(4) Is listed for providing PV ground-fault protection
Change Description:
This change provides clarification regarding ground-fault
protection devices installed in the ungrounded PV systems.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 152 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
690.35 Ungrounded Photovoltaic Power Systems. Photovoltaic power systems shall be permitted to operate with
ungrounded photovoltaicPV source and output circuits
where the system complies with 690.35(A) through (G).
(D) Conductors. The photovoltaicPV source conductors
shall consist of the following:
(1) Nonmetallic Metallic or nonmetallic jacketed multiconductor cables
(2) Conductors installed in raceways, orraceways
(3) Conductors listed and identified as Photovoltaic (PV)
Wire PV wire installed as exposed, single conductors., or
(4) Conductors that are direct-buried and identified for
direct-burial use
Change Description:
This change provides clarification regarding ground-fault
protection devices installed in the ungrounded PV systems.
690.41 System Grounding. For a photovoltaic power
source, one conductor of a 2-wire system with a photovoltaic system voltage over 50 volts and the reference (center
tap) conductor of a bipolar system shall be solidly
grounded or shall use other methods that accomplish
equivalent system protection in accordance with 250.4(A)
and that utilize equipment listed and identified for the use.
Change Description:
Section revised for clarity into a list format. Also, removed
reference to “over 50 volts” since the section now covers all
voltage levels of PV systems.
Exception: Systems complying with 690.35.
Photovoltaic systems shall comply with one of the
following:
(1) Ungrounded systems shall comply with 690.35.
(2) Grounded two-wire systems shall have one conductor
grounded or be impedance grounded, and the system
shall comply with 690.5.
(3) Grounded bipolar systems shall have the reference
(center tap) conductor grounded or be impedance
grounded, and the system shall comply with 690.5.
(4) Other methods that accomplish equivalent system protection in accordance with 250.4(A) with equipment
listed and identified for the use shall be permitted to be
used.
690.45 Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Page 153 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Equipment grounding conductors for photovoltaicPV
source and photovoltaicPV output circuits shall be sized in
accordance with 690.45(A)250.122 or (B).. Where no overcurrent protective device is used in the circuit, an assumed
overcurrent device rated at the PV maximum circuit current
shall be used when applying Table 250.122. Increases in
equipment grounding conductor size to address voltage
drop considerations shall not be required. An equipment
grounding conductor shall not be smaller than 14 AWG.
A) General. Equipment grounding conductors in photovoltaic source and photovoltaic output circuits shall be
sized in accordance with Table 250.122. Where no overcurrent protective device is used in the circuit, an assumed
overcurrent device rated at the photovoltaic rated shortcircuit current shall be used in Table 250.122. Increases in
equipment grounding conductor size to address voltage
drop considerations shall not be required. The equipment
grounding conductors shall be no smaller than 14 AWG.
Revised section to move text from a subsection to the main body
and removed portions no longer valid as a result of changes to
other sections in this article.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Ground-Fault Protection Not Provided. For other
than dwelling units where ground-fault protection is not
provided in accordance with 690.5(A) through (C), each
equipment grounding conductor shall have an ampacity of
at least two (2) times the temperature and conduit fill corrected circuit conductor ampacity.
690.46 Array Equipment Grounding Conductors.
Equipment grounding conductors for photovoltaic modulesFor PV modules, equipment grounding conductors
smaller than 6 AWG shall comply with 250.120(C).
Where installed in raceways, equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors not larger than
6 AWG shall be permitted to be solid.
Change Description:
This change addresses a concern related to migration of water in
strands of a conductor and subsequent degradation of the
conductor and connections of conductors smaller than #6 AWG.
690.47 Grounding Electrode System.
(B) Direct-Current Systems. If installing a dc system, a
grounding electrode system shall be provided in accordance
with 250.166 for grounded systems or 250.169 for un-
Change Description:
This added text addresses equipment grounding requirements in
ungrounded PV arrays connected to utility-interactive inverters,
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 154 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
grounded systems. The grounding electrode conductor shall
be installed in accordance with 250.64.
A common dc grounding-electrode conductor shall be
permitted to serve multiple inverters. The size of the common grounding electrode and the tap conductors shall be in
accordance with 250.166. The tap conductors shall be connected to the common grounding-electrode conductor by
exothermic welding or with connectors listed as grounding
and bonding equipment in such a manner that the common
grounding electrode conductor remains without a splice or
joint.
An ac equipment grounding system shall be permitted to
be used for equipment grounding of inverters and other
equipment and for the ground-fault detection reference for
ungrounded PV systems.
as allowed by 690.35.
690.47 Grounding Electrode System.
(C) Systems with Alternating-Current and DirectCurrent Grounding Requirements. Photovoltaic systems
having dc circuits and ac circuits with no direct connection
between the dc grounded conductor and ac grounded conductor shall have a dc grounding system. The dc grounding
system shall be bonded to the ac grounding system by one
of the methods in (1), (2), or (3).
This section shall not apply to ac PV modules.
When using the methods of (C)(2) or (C)(3), the existing ac
grounding electrode system shall meet the applicable
requirements of Article 250, Part III.
(3) Combined Direct-Current Grounding Electrode
Conductor
and
Alternating-Current Equipment
Grounding Conductor. An unspliced, or irreversibly
spliced, combined grounding conductor shall be run from
the marked dc grounding electrode conductor connection
point along with the ac circuit conductors to the grounding
busbar in the associated ac equipment. This combined
grounding conductor shall be the larger of the sizes specified by 250.122 or 250.166 and shall be installed in accordance with 250.64(E). For ungrounded systems, this con-
Change Description:
Added wording addresses equipment grounding requirements in
ungrounded PV systems.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 155 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ductor shall be sized in accordance with 250.122 and shall
not be required to be larger than the largest ungrounded
phase conductor.
690.47 Grounding Electrode System.
(D) Additional Auxiliary Electrodes for Array Grounding. A grounding electrode shall be installed in accordance
with 250.52 and 250.54 at the location of all ground- and
pole-mounted PV arrays and as close as practicable to the
location of roof-mounted PV arrays. The electrodes shall be
connected directly to the array frame(s) or structure. The dc
grounding electrode conductor shall be sized according to
250.166. Additional electrodes are not permitted to be used
as a substitute for equipment bonding or equipment grounding conductor requirements. The structure of a ground- or
pole-mounted PV array shall be permitted to be considered
a grounding electrode if it meets the requirements of
250.52. Roof-mounted PV arrays shall be permitted to use
the metal frame of a building or structure if the requirements of 250.52(A)(2) are met.
Change Description:
Re-inserted subsection 690.47(D), inadvertently removed from
the code in 2011.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception No. 1: An array grounding electrode(s) shall
not be required where the load served by the array is integral with the array.
Exception No. 2:
An additional array grounding electrode(s) shall not be required if located within 1.8 m (6 ft)
of the premises wiring electrode.
690.53 Direct-Current Photovoltaic Power Source. A
permanent label for the direct-current photovoltaicPV
power source indicating items the information specified in
(1) through (5) shall be provided by the installer at the
photovoltaicPV disconnecting means:
(1) Rated maximum power-point current.
(2) Rated maximum power-point voltage.
(3) Maximum system voltage.
(4) Short-circuit current Maximum circuit current. Where
the PV power source has multiple outputs, 690.53(1) and
(4) shall be specified for each output.
Change Description:
Clarified the expectations regarding labeling of PV power sources
and removed a conflict in terminology between “maximum circuit
current” and “short-circuit current”, as they are used in other
sections of this article.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 156 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
690.56 Identification of Power Sources.
(C) Facilities with Rapid Shutdown. Buildings or structures with both utility service and a PV system, complying
with 690.12, shall have a permanent plaque or directory
including the following wording:
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM EQUIPPED
WITH RAPID SHUTDOWN
The plaque or directory shall be reflective, with all letters capitalized and having a minimum height of 9.5 mm
(3⁄8 in.), in white on red background.
Change Description:
Added requirements for labeling facilities equipped with a rapid
shutdown.
VIII. Storage Batteries
Change Description:
Added a new subsection addressing installation of disconnects
and overcurrent protection for storage batteries.
690.71 Installation.
(H) Disconnects and Overcurrent Protection. Where energy storage device input and output terminals are more
than 1.5 m (5 ft) from connected equipment, or where the
circuits from these terminals pass through a wall or partition, the installation shall comply with the following:
(1) A disconnecting means and overcurrent protection shall
be provided at the energy storage device end of the
circuit. Fused disconnecting means or circuit breakers
shall be permitted to be used.
(2) Where fused disconnecting means are used, the line
terminals of the disconnecting means shall be connected toward the energy storage device terminals.
(3) Overcurrent devices or disconnecting means shall not
be installed in energy storage device enclosures where
explosive atmospheres can exist.
(4) A second disconnecting means located at the connected
equipment shall be installed where the disconnecting
means required by 690.71(H)(1) is not within sight of
the connected equipment.
(5) Where the energy storage device disconnecting means
is not within sight of the PV system ac and dc disconnecting means, placards or directories shall be installed
at the locations of all disconnecting means indicating
the location of all disconnecting means.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety – no negative impact.
Page 157 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
IX. Systems over 6001000 Volts
690.81 Listing. Products listed for PV systems shall be
permitted to be used and installed in accordance with their
listing. PV wire that is listed for direct burial at voltages
above 600 volts, but not exceeding 2000 volts, shall be
installed in accordance with Table 300.50, column 1.
Change Description:
This change addresses listing requirements for PV systems over
1000 V.
X. Electric Vehicle Charging
690.90 General. Photovoltaic systems used directly to
charge electric vehicles shall comply with Article 625 in
addition to the requirements of this article.
Change Description:
Added references to Article 625, Electric Vehicle Charging
Systems, for PV systems used directly to charge electric vehicles.
690.91 Charging Equipment. Electric vehicle couplers
shall comply with 625.10. Personnel protection systems in
accordance with 625.22 and automatic de-energization of
cables in accordance with 625.19 are not required for PV
systems with maximum system voltages of less than
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 694
Wind Electric Systems
(Note: Changes to this Article in general are not applicable and are not addressed in this evaluation)
695.3 Power Source(s) for Electric Motor-Driven Fire
Pumps. Electric motor-driven fire pumps shall have a reliable source of power.
(F) Transfer of Power. Transfer of power to the fire pump
controller between the individual source and one alternate
source shall take place within the pump room. [20:9.6.4]
(1) Power Source Selection. Selection of power source
shall be performed by a transfer switch listed for fire pump
service. [20:10.8.1.3.1]
ARTICLE 695
Fire Pumps
Change Description:
This change correlates Section 695.3 with NFPA 20. Also, it adds
text allowing overcurrent protection device for the fire pump to be
provided as a part of transfer switch assembly.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Overcurrent Device Selection. An instantaneous trip
circuit breaker shall be permitted in lieu of the overcurrent
Page 158 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
devices specified in 695.4(B)(2)(a)(1), provided that it is
part of a transfer switch assembly listed for fire pump service that complies with 695.4(B)(2)(a)(2).
695.4 Continuity of Power. Circuits that supply electric
motor-–driven fire pumps shall be supervised from inadvertent disconnection as covered in 695.4(A) or (B).
(A) Direct Connection. The supply conductors shall directly connect the power source to either a listed fire pump
controller orcontroller, a listed combination fire pump controller and power transfer switch, or a listed fire pump
power transfer switch.
(B) Connection Through Disconnecting Means and
Overcurrent Device.
(a) Individual Sources. Overcurrent protection for individual sources shall comply with 695.4(B)(2)(a)(1) or
(2).
(1) The oOvercurrent protective device(s) shall be rated to
carry indefinitely the sum of the locked-rotor current of
largest fire pump motor(s)motor and the pressure
maintenance pump motor(s) and the full-load current of
all of the other pump motors and the associated fire
pump accessory equipment when connected to this
power supply. (…)
(2) Overcurrent protection shall be provided by an assembly listed for fire pump service and complying with the
following:
Change Description:
This change correlates Section 695.4 with NFPA 20. Also,
clarifies requirements regarding locking provisions for
disconnecting means, consistent with the rest of the code.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
a. The overcurrent protective device shall not open
within 2 minutes at 600 percent of the full-load
current of the fire pump motor(s).
b. The overcurrent protective device shall not open
with a re-start transient of 24 times the full-load
current of the fire pump motor(s).
c. The overcurrent protective device shall not open
within 10 minutes at 300 percent of the full-load
current of the fire pump motor(s).
d. The trip point for circuit breakers shall not be
field adjustable. [20:9.2.3.4.1]
Page 159 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(3) Disconnecting Means. All disconnecting
devices that are unique to the fire pump loads
shall comply with items (a) through (e).
(a) Features and Location — Normal Power Source. The
disconnecting means for the normal power source shall
comply with all of the following: [20:9.2.3.1]
(2) Be lockable in the closed position. The provision for
locking or adding a lock to the disconnecting means
shall be installed on or at the switch or circuit breaker
used as the disconnecting means and shall remain in
place w i t h or without the lock installed.
(3) Not be located within equipment the same enclosure,
panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, or motor control
center, with or without common bus, that feedssupplies
loads other than the fire pump.
(b) Features and Location — On-Site Standby Generator.
The disconnecting means for an on-site standby generator(s) used as the alternate power source shall be
installed in accordance with 700.10(B)(5) for emergency
circuits and shall be lockable in the closed position. The
provision for locking or adding a lock to the
disconnecting means shall be installed on or at the
switch or circuit breaker used as the disconnecting
means and shall remain in place with or without the
lock installed.
695.6 Power Wiring. Power circuits and wiring methods
shall comply with the requirements in 695.6(A) through (J),
and as permitted in 230.90(A), Exception No. 4; 230.94,
Exception No. 4; 240.13; 230.208; 240.4(A); and 430.31.
(D) Pump Wiring. All wiring from the controllers to the
pump motors shall be in rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, liquidtight flexible
metal conduit, or liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit
Type LFNC-B, listed Type MC cable with an impervious
covering, or Type MI cable. Electrical connections at motor
Change Description:
Connections in motor terminal boxes made with twist-on,
insulation-piercing and soldered connectors have been shown to
compromise from motor vibration and thus become a source of
failures such as disconnection, overheating, ground fault, and
short circuit. Para. 13.5.9.2 of NFPA 79 (Industrial Machinery)
already prohibits their use.
Impact(s) :
Page 160 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
terminal boxes shall be made with a listed means of connection. Twist-on, insulation-piercing–type, and soldered
wire connectors shall not be permitted to be used for this
purpose.
Relay, Automatic Load Control. A device used to energize switched set normally dimmed or normally-off
switched emergency lighting equipment from an emergency supply to full power illumination levels in the event
of a loss of the normal supply, and to de-energize or supply
by bypassing the dimming/switching controls, and to return
the emergency lighting equipment to normal status when
the device senses the normal supply ishas been restored.
700.8 Surge Protection. A listed SPD shall be installed in
or on all emergency systems switchboards and panelboards.
Improves safety - no negative impact.
ARTICLE 700
Emergency Systems
Change Description:
Added dimming devices to be overridden by an automatic load
control relay.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for a listed surge protection devices to be
added in or on all emergency system switchboards and
panelboards.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
700.10 Wiring, Emergency System.
(D) Fire Protection. Emergency systems shall meet the
additional requirements in (D)(1) through (D)(3) in assembly occupancies for not less than 1000 persons or in buildings above 23 m (75 ft) in height with any of the following
occupancy classes: assembly, educational, residential, detention and correctional, business, and mercantile.
700.12 General Requirements.
(B) Generator Set.
(6) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an outdoor housed
generator set is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means in accordance with 445.18, and the discon-
Change Description:
The need for fire protection of emergency systems is the same
regardless of the occupancy classification. This change
eliminates potential exclusion of some of the assembly
occupancies from the requirements of this section.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This change clarifies the expectations regarding disconnecting
means for outdoor generator sets and provides reference to
Section 445.18.
Page 161 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
necting means is located within sight of the building or
structure supplied, an additional disconnecting means shall
not be required where ungrounded conductors serve or pass
through the building or structure. Where the generator supply conductors terminate at a disconnecting means in or on
a building or structure, Tthe disconnecting means shall
meet the requirements of 225.36.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
700.16 Emergency Illumination. Emergency illumination
shall include all required means of egress lighting, illuminated exit signs, and all other lights specified as necessary
to provide required illumination.
Emergency lighting systems shall be designed and installed so that the failure of any individual lighting element,
such as the burning out of a lamp, cannot leave in total
darkness any space that requires emergency illumination.
Where high-intensity discharge lighting such as highand low-pressure sodium, mercury vapor, and metal halide
is used as the sole source of normal illumination, the emergency lighting system shall be required to operate until
normal illumination has been restored.
Where an emergency system is installed, emergency
illumination shall be provided in the area of the disconnecting means required by 225.31 and 230.70, as applicable,
where the disconnecting means are installed indoors.
Change Description:
Added a requirement for emergency illumination in the indoor
areas of the disconnecting means installed per 225.31 and
230.70.
700.19 Multiwire Branch Circuits. The branch circuit
serving emergency lighting and power circuits shall not be
part of a multiwire branch circuit.
Change Description:
This requirement was added to prevent unnecessary opening of
one or two poles of a multi-wire branch circuit because of an
overload or short circuit on one pole of a multi-wire circuit
overcurrent protection. This change is consistent with similar
requirement covered in Article 517.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
700.24 Directly Controlled Luminaires. Where emer-
Change Description:
Page 162 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
gency illumination is provided by one or more directly
controlled luminaires that respond to an external control
input to bypass normal control upon loss of normal power,
such luminaires and external bypass controls shall be individually listed for use in emergency systems.
This change expands bypass requirements for dimmed
luminaires to luminaires with internal onboard dimming capability.
700.26700.27 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment.
The alternate source for emergency systems shall not be
required to have ground-fault protection of equipment with
automatic disconnecting means. Ground-fault indication of
the emergency source shall be provided in accordance with
700.6(D).700.6(D) if ground-fault protection of equipment
with automatic disconnecting means is not provided.
Change Description:
Reworded section for clarity of intent.
700.27700.28 Selective Coordination.
Emergency system(s) overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply-side overcurrent protective devices.
Selective coordination shall be selected by a licensed
professional engineer or other qualified persons engaged
primarily in the design, installation, or maintenance of electrical systems. The selection shall be documented and made
available to those authorized to design, install, inspect,
maintain, and operate the system.
Change Description:
The additional language adds a requirement and identifies who is
responsible for ensuring selective coordination of an emergency
system’s overcurrent devices.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
May have an impact on design agencies to have documentation
from licensed professional engineer or other qualified person to
meet the requirement. No negative impact.
ARTICLE 701
Legally Required Standby Systems
701.12 General Requirements.
Change Description:
(B) Generator Set.
This change clarifies the expectations regarding disconnecting
(5) Outdoor Generator Sets. Where an outdoor housed
means for outdoor generator sets and provides reference to
generator set is equipped with a readily accessible disconSection 445.18.
necting means in accordance with 445.18, and the disconImpact(s) :
necting means is located within sight of the building or
structure supplied, an additional disconnecting means shall
No negative impact.
not be required where ungrounded conductors serve or pass
through the building or structure. Where the generator supply conductors terminate at a disconnecting means in or on
Page 163 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
a building or structure, Tthe disconnecting means shall
meet the requirements of 225.36.
701.26 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment. The alternate source for legally required standby systems shall not be
required to have ground-fault protection of equipment with
automatic disconnecting means. Ground-fault indica- tion of
the legally required standby source shall be pro- vided in
accordance with 701.6(D).701.6(D) if ground-fault protection
of equipment with automatic disconnecting means is not
provided.
Change Description:
Reworded section for clarity of intent.
701.27 Selective Coordination. Legally required standby
system(s) overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply-side overcurrent protective devices.
Selective coordination shall be selected by a licensed
professional engineer or other qualified persons engaged
primarily in the design, installation, or maintenance of electrical systems. The selection shall be documented and made
available to those authorized to design, install, inspect,
maintain, and operate the system.
Change Description:
The additional language adds a requirement and identifies who is
responsible for ensuring selective coordination of an emergency
system’s overcurrent devices.
702.7 Signs.
(C) Power Inlet. Where a power inlet is used for a temporary connection to a portable generator, a warning sign
shall be placed near the inlet to indicate the type of derived
system that the system is capable of based on the wiring of
the transfer equipment. The sign shall display one of the
following warnings:
WARNING:
FOR CONNECTION OF A SEPARATELY DERIVED
(BONDED NEUTRAL) SYSTEM ONLY
or
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
May have an impact on design agencies to have documentation
from licensed professional engineer or other qualified person to
meet the requirement.
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 702
Optional Standby Systems
Change Description:
A new provision was added requiring a warning sign at the power
inlet for temporary connection to a portable generator, indicating
type of derived system.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
Page 164 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
WARNING:
FOR CONNECTION OF A NONSEPARATELY
DERIVED (FLOATING NEUTRAL) SYSTEM ONLY
702.12 Outdoor Generator Sets.
(A) Permanently Installed Generators and Portable
Generators Greater Than 15 kW. Where an outdoor
housed generator set is equipped with a readily accessible
disconnecting means in accordance with 445.18, and the
disconnecting means is located within sight of the building or
structure supplied, an additional disconnecting means shall
not be required where ungrounded conductors serve or pass
through the building or structure. Where the generator supply
conductors terminate at a disconnecting means in or on a
building or structure, Tthe disconnecting means shall meet
the requirements of 225.36.
B) Portable Generators 15 kW or Less. Where a portable generator, rated 15 kW or less, is installed using a
flanged inlet or other cord- and plug-type connection, a
disconnecting means shall not be required where ungrounded conductors serve or pass through a building or
structure.
Change Description:
This change clarifies the expectations regarding disconnecting
means for outdoor generator sets and provides reference to
Section 445.18. Also, the section is now divided into two
subsections, for generators greater than 15 kW and generators
15 kW or less. For generators 15 kW or less this new subsection
allows omitting disconnecting means for flanged inlet and cordand plug-type connection where ungrounded conductors serve or
pass through a building or structure. This provision correlates the
requirements with revised section 445.18.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 705
Interconnected Electric Power Production Sources
705.12 Point of Connection. The output of an interconChange Description:
nected electric power source shall be connected as specified in Section 705.12(D) was rearranged and reorganized for better
705.12(A), (B), (C), or (D).
clarity. Also, deleted redundant ground-fault protection
(D) Utility-Interactive Inverters.
requirements which are already covered in Section 705.32.
(2) Bus or Conductor Ampere Rating. The sum of the
ampere ratings of overcurrent devices in circuits supplying
power to a busbar or conductor shall not exceed 120 per- cent
of the rating of the busbar or conductor.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Exception: Where the photovoltaic system has an energy
storage device to allow stand-alone operation of loads, the
value used in the calculation of bus or conductor loading shall
be 125 percent of the rated utility-interactive current from the
inverter instead of the rating of the overcurrent device
Page 165 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
between the inverter and the bus or conductor.
One hundred twenty-five percent of the inverter output circuit current shall be used in ampacity calculations for the
following:
(1) Feeders. Where the inverter output connection is made to
a feeder at a location other than the opposite end of the
feeder from the primary source overcurrent device, that
portion of the feeder on the load side of the in- verter
output connection shall be protected by one of the
following:
(a) The feeder ampacity shall be not less than the sum
of the primary source overcurrent device and
125 percent of the inverter output circuit current.
(b) An overcurrent device on the load side of the inverter connection shall be rated not greater than the
ampacity of the feeder.
(2) Taps.In systems where inverter output connections are
made at feeders, any taps shall be sized based on the
sum of 125 percent of the inverter(s) output circuit current
and the rating of the overcurrent device protect- ing the
feeder conductors as calculated in 240.21(B).
3) Busbars. One of the methods that follows shall be used to
determine the ratings of busbars in panelboards.
(a) The sum of 125 percent of the inverter(s) output
circuit current and the rating of the overcurrent
device protecting the busbar shall not exceed the
ampacity of the busbar.
(b) Where two sources, one a utility and the other an
inverter, are located at opposite ends of a busbar
that contains loads, the sum of 125 percent of the
inverter(s) output circuit current and the rating of
the overcurrent device protecting the busbar shall
not exceed 120 percent of the ampacity of the
busbar. The busbar shall be sized for the loads
connected in accordance with Article 220. A
permanent warning label shall be applied to the
distribution equipment adjacent to the back-fed
Page 166 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
breaker from the inverter that displays the
following or equivalent wording:
WARNING:
INVERTER OUTPUT CONNECTION;
DO NOT RELOCATE THIS OVERCURRENT
DEVICE.
The warning sign(s) or label (s) shall comply
with 110.21(B).
(c) The sum of the ampere ratings of all
overcurrent devices on panelboards, both load and
supply devices, excluding the rating of the
overcurrent device protecting the busbar, shall not
exceed the ampacity of the busbar. The rating of
the overcurrent device protecting the busbar shall
not exceed the rating of the busbar. Permanent
warning labels shall be applied to distribution
equipment that displays the following or
equivalent wording:
WARNING:
THIS EQUIPMENT FED BY MULTIPLE SOURCES.
TOTAL RATING OF ALL OVERCURRENT
DEVICES, EXCLUDING MAIN SUPPLY
OVERCURRENT DEVICE,
SHALL NOT EXCEED AMPACITY OF
BUSBAR.
The warning sign(s) or label (s) shall comply
with
110.21(B).
(d) Connections shall be permitted on multipleampacity busbars or center-fed panelboards where
designed under engineering supervision that
includes fault studies and busbar load
calculations.
(3) Ground-Fault Protection. The interconnection point
shall be on the line side of all ground-fault protection
equipment.
Page 167 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Exception: Connection shall be permitted to be made to the
load side of ground-fault protection, provided that there is
ground-fault protection for equipment from all ground- fault
current sources. Ground-fault protection devices used with
supplies connected to the load-side terminals shall be
identified and listed as suitable for backfeeding.
(7) Inverter Output Connection. Unless the panelboard is
rated not less than the sum of the ampere ratings of all
overcurrent devices supplying it, a connection in a panelboard shall be positioned at the opposite (load) end from
the input feeder location or main circuit location. The bus or
conductor rating shall be sized for the loads connected in
accordance with Article 220. In systems with panelboards
connected in series, the rating of the first overcurrent device
directly connected to the output of a utility-interactive inverter(s) shall be used in the calculations for all busbars and
conductors. A permanent warning label shall be applied to
the distribution equipment with the following or equivalent
wording:
WARNING
INVERTER OUTPUT
CONNECTION DO NOT
RELOCATE THIS
OVERCURRENT DEVICE
(6) Wire Harness and Exposed Cable Arc-Fault
Protection. A utility-interactive inverter(s) that has a wire
harness or cable output circuit rated 240 V, 30 amperes, or
less, that is not installed within an enclosed raceway, shall
be provided with listed ac AFCI protection.
705.31 Location of Overcurrent Protection. Overcurrent
protection for electric power production source conductors,
connected to the supply side of the service disconnecting
means in accordance with 705.12(A), shall be located
within 3 m (10 ft) of the point where the electric power
production source conductors are connected to the service.
Exception: Where the overcurrent protection for the power
Change Description:
This new section provides requirements for placing overcurrent
protection within three meters from the point where the electric
power production source conductors are connected to the
service. If the distance from the connection point to the
overcurrent protection device exceeds 3 meters, the new
exception allows using cable limiters or current-limited circuit
Page 168 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
production source is located more than 3 m (10 ft) from the
point of connection for the electric power production
source to the service, cable limiters or current-limited circuit breakers for each ungrounded conductor shall be installed at the point where the electric power production
conductors are connected to the service.
breakers at the connection point as a protection for the otherwise
unprotected conductors.
705.100 Unbalanced Interconnections.
(A) Single Phase. Single-phase inverters for hybrid systems and ac modules in interactive hybrid systems shall not
be connected to 3three-phase power systems unless the interconnected system is designed so that significant unbalanced voltages cannot result.in order to limit unbalanced
voltages to not more than 3 percent.
Change Description:
Removed unenforceable language (i.e., “significant”) and
replaced it with a specific value of an acceptable voltage
unbalance.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 708
Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS)
708.14 Wiring of HVAC, Fire Alarm, Security, EmerChange Description:
gency Communications, and Signaling Systems. All conReworded section for clarity of intent and added a riser-rated
ductors or cables shall be installed using any of the metal
cable as an acceptable emergency communication cable.
wiring methods permitted by 708.10(C)(1) and, in addition,
shall comply with 708.14(1) through (8), as applicable.
(1) All cables for fire alarm, security, signaling systems,
and emergency communications shall be shielded
twisted pair cables or installed to comply with the performance requirements of the system.
(2) Shields of cables for fire alarm, s e c u r i t y , signaling
systems, and emergency communications shall be
continuous. arranged in accordance with the
manufacturer’s published installation instructions.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(7) All cables for fire a l a r m , security, and signaling
sys- tems shall be riser-rated and shall be a listed 2hour electrical circuit protective system.
Riser
emergency Emergency communication cables shall
be Type CMR-CI or shall be riser-rated and shall
Page 169 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
be a listed 2-hour electrical circuit protective system.
708.20 Sources of Power.
(F) Generator Set.
(5) Outdoor Generator Sets.
(a) Permanently Installed Generators and Portable
Generators Greater Than 15 kW. Where an outdoor housed
generator set is equipped with a readily accessible disconnecting means in accordance with 445.18, and the disconnecting means is located within sight of the building or
structure supplied, an additional disconnecting means shall
not be required where ungrounded conductors serve or pass
through the building or structure. Where the generator supply conductors terminate at a disconnecting means in or on
a building or structure, the disconnecting means shall meet
the requirements of 225.36.
(b) Portable Generators 15 kW or Less. Where a portable generator, rated 15 kW or less, is installed using a
flanged inlet or other cord-and plug-type connection, a disconnecting means shall not be required where ungrounded
conductors serve or pass through a building or structure.
Change Description:
Revised to correlate with changes in Articles 700, 701, and 702.
This change clarifies the expectations regarding disconnecting
means for outdoor generator sets and provides reference to
Section 445.18. Also, the section is now divided into two
subsections, for generators greater than 15 kW and generators
15 kW or less. For generators 15 kW or less this new subsection
allows omitting disconnecting means for flanged inlet and cordand plug-type connection where ungrounded conductors serve or
pass through a building or structure. This provision correlates the
requirements with revised Section 445.18.
708.52 Ground-Fault Protection of Equipment.
(D) Selectivity. Ground-fault protection for operation of
the service and feeder disconnecting means shall be fully
selective such that the feeder device, but not the service
device, shall open on ground faults on the load side of the
feeder device. A six-cycle minimum separation between the
service and feeder Separation of ground-fault tripping
bands protection time-current characteristics shall be provided. conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations
Operating time of the disconnecting devices shall be considered in selecting the time spread between these two
bands and shall consider all required tolerances and disconnect operating time to achieve 100 percent selectivity.
708.54 Selective Coordination. Critical operations power
system(s) overcurrent devices shall be selectively coordinated with all supply-side overcurrent protective devices.
Selective coordination shall be selected by a licensed
Change Description:
Revised to reflect changes to Section 517.17(C), introduced in
2008 edition of the Code. This change improves selective
coordination for COPS.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
The additional language adds a requirement and identifies who is
responsible for ensuring selective coordination of a COPS’
Page 170 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
professional engineer or other qualified persons engaged
primarily in the design, installation, or maintenance of electrical systems. The selection shall be documented and made
available to those authorized to design, install, inspect,
maintain, and operate the system.
Exception: Selective coordination shall not be required
between two overcurrent devices located in series if no
loads are connected in parallel with the downstream
device.
overcurrent devices.
Impact(s) :
May have an impact on design agencies to have documentation
from licensed professional engineer or other qualified person to
meet the requirement.
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 725
Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3
Remote-Control, Signaling, and
Power-Limited Circuits
Power-Limited Tray Cable (PLTC). A factory assembly of Change Description:
two or more insulated conductors rated at 300 V, with or Added definition for Power-Limited Tray Cable.
without associated bare or insulated equipment grounding
conductors, under a nonmetallic jacket.
725.49 Class 1 Circuit Conductors.
(B) Insulation. Insulation on conductors shall be rated for
the system voltage and not less than 600 volts.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Clarified the language regarding applicability of this Article
regarding Class 1 circuit conductor insulation.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
725.135 Installation of Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC
Cables. Installation of Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC cables
shall comply with 725.135(A) through (M).
(A) Listing. Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC cables installed in
buildings shall be listed.
(B) Fabricated Ducts Used for Environmental Air. The
Change Description:
Added new section addressing installation of Class 2, Class 3,
and PLTC cables, similar to Section 800.13, covering
communication circuits, including plenum grade cable routing
assemblies. This is a companion change to the revision of
Section 725.154, separating application and installation rules in to
two sections.
Page 171 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
following wires and cables shall be permitted in ducts used
for environmental air as described in 300.22(B) if they are
directly associated with the air distribution system:
(1) Types CL2P and CL3P cables in lengths as short as
practicable to perform the required function
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables installed in raceways that are
installed in compliance with 300.22(B)
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). The following cables shall be permitted in other
spaces used for environmental air as described in
300.22(C):
(1) Types CL2P and CL3 cables
(2) Types CL2P and CL3P cables installed in plenum communications raceways
(3) Types CL2P and CL3P cables and plenum communications raceways supported by open metallic cable trays
or cable tray systems
(4) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables installed in raceways that are
installed in compliance with 300.22(C)
(5) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables supported by solid bottom
metal cable trays with solid metal covers in other
spaces used for environmental air (plenums) as described in 300.22(C)
(6) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables installed in plenum communications raceways, riser communications raceways, and
general-purpose communications raceways supported
by solid bottom metal cable trays with solid metal covers in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums) as described in 300.22(C)
(D) Risers — Cables in Vertical Runs. The following
cables shall be permitted in vertical runs penetrating one or
more floors and in vertical runs in a shaft:
Page 172 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, and CL3R cables
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, and CL3R cables installed
in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
(E) Risers — Cables in Metal Raceways. The following
cables shall be permitted in metal raceways in a riser having firestops at each floor:
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Riser communications raceways
c. General-purpose communications raceways
(F) Risers — Cables in Fireproof Shafts. The following
shall be permitted to be installed in fireproof riser shafts
having firestops at each floor:
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(G) Risers — One- and Two-Family Dwellings. The
following cables shall be permitted in one- and two-family
dwellings:
Page 173 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables
(2) Types CL2X and CL3X cables less than 6 mm
(0.25 in.) in diameter
(3) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(H) Cable Trays. Cables installed in cable trays outdoors
shall be Type PLTC. The following cables shall be permitted to be supported by cable trays in buildings:
(1) Types CM CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Riser communications raceways
c. General-purpose communications raceways
(I) Cross-Connect Arrays. The following cables shall be
permitted to be installed in cross-connect arrays:
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables
(2) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
Page 174 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(J) Industrial Establishments. In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision
ensure that only qualified persons service the installation,
Type PLTC cable shall be permitted in accordance with
either (1) or (2) as follows:
(1) Where the cable is not subject to physical damage,
Type PLTC cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC cable and is identified as
LTC-ER for such use shall be permitted to be exposed
between the cable tray and the utilization equipment or
device. The cable shall be continuously supported and
protected against physical damage using mechanical
protection such as dedicated struts, angles, or channels.
The cable shall be supported and secured at intervals
not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft).
(2) Type PLTC cable, with a metallic sheath or armor in
accordance with 725.179(E), shall be permitted to be
installed exposed. The cable shall be continuously
sup- ported and protected against physical damage
using mechanical protection such as dedicated struts,
angles, or channels. The cable shall be secured at
intervals not exceeding 1.8 m (6 ft).
(K) Other Building Locations. The following wires and
cables shall be permitted to be installed in building locations other than the locations covered in 725.135(B)
through (I):
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables
(2) A maximum of 3 m (10 ft) of exposed Type CL2X wires
and cables in nonconcealed spaces
(3) A maximum of 3 m (10 ft) of exposed Type CL3X wires
and cables in nonconcealed spaces
(4) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC cables installed in the following:
Page 175 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(5) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC cables installed in raceways recognized in Chapter 3
(6) Type CMUC undercarpet communications wires and
cables installed under carpet
(L) Multifamily Dwellings. The following wires and
cables shall be permitted to be installed in multifamily
dwellings in locations other than the locations covered in
725.135(B) through (I):
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC wires and cables
(2) Type CL2X wires and cables less than 6 mm (0.25 in.)
in diameter in nonconcealed spaces
(3) Type CL3X wires and cables less than 6 mm (0.25 in.)
in diameter in nonconcealed spaces
(4) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC wires and cables installed in the following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(5) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3,
CL2X, CL3X, and PLTC wires and cables installed
in race- ways recognized in Chapter 3
(6) Type CMUC undercarpet communications wires
and cables installed under carpet
Page 176 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(M) One- and Two-Family Dwellings. The following
wires and cables shall be permitted to be installed in oneand two-family dwellings in locations other than the locations covered in 725.135(B) through (I):
(1) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, and
PLTC wires and cables
(2) Type CL2X wires and cables less than 6 mm (0.25 in.)
in diameter
(3) Type CL3X wires and cables less than 6 mm (0.25 in.)
in diameter
(4) Communications wires and Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R,
CL3R, CL2, CL3, and PLTC cables installed in the
following:
a. Plenum communications raceways
b. Plenum cable routing assemblies
c. Riser communications raceways
d. Riser cable routing assemblies
e. General-purpose communications raceways
f. General-purpose cable routing assemblies
(5) Types CL2P, CL3P, CL2R, CL3R, CL2, CL3, CL2X,
CL3X, and PLTC wires and cables installed in raceways recognized in Chapter 3
(6) Type CMUC undercarpet communications wires and
cables installed under carpet
725.154 Applications of Listed Class 2, Class 3, and
PLTC Cables. Class 2, Class 3, and PLTC cables shall
comply with any of the requirements described in
25.154(A) through (I). (C) and as indicated in Table
725.154.
(GA) Class 2 and Class 3 Cable Substitutions. The substitutions for Class 2 and Class 3 cables listed in
Table 725.154(GA) and illustrated in Figure 725.154(GA)
shall be permitted. Where substitute cables are installed, the
wiring requirements of Article 725, Parts I and III, shall
Change Description:
Converted descriptive portion of this section to a table format
(Table 725.154). This is a companion change to the added
Section 725.135, separating application and installation rules in to
two sections.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 177 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
apply.
725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3, and
Type PLTC Cables; Communications Raceways; and
Cable Routing Assemblies. Class 2, Class 3, and Type
PLTC cables and cables, nonmetallic signaling raceways
and cable routing assemblies installed as wiring methods
within buildings shall be listed as being resistant to the
spread of fire and other criteria in accordance with
725.179(A) through (K)(J) and shall be marked in accordance with 725.179(L).725.179 (K).
(F) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit
Protective System. Cables that are used for survivability of
critical circuits under fire conditions shall be listed as circuit integrity (CI) cable.meet either 725.179(F)(1) or (F)(2)
as follows:
(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Circuit Integrity (CI)
cables, specified in 725.154(A), and (B), used for survivability of critical circuits, shall have the additional classification using the suffix “CI.” Circuit integrity (CI) cables
shall only be permitted to be installed in a raceway where
specifically listed and marked as part of an electrical circuit
protective system as covered in 725.179(F)(2).
Change Description:
This change separates the two methods of establishing cable
survivability. Cable are either tested as a CI cable or tested as
part of an electrical circuit protective system. The new text
clarifies the two cable options and marking requirements.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables specified
in 725.154(A), and (B), (D)(1), and (E), and used for circuit
integrity that are part of an electrical circuit protective system shall have the additional classification using the suffix
“-CI”. Cables that are part of a listed electrical circuit protective system shall be considered to meet the requirements of
survivability. be identified with the protective system number
and hourly rating printed on the outer jacket of the cable and
installed in accordance with the listing of the protective system.
725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3, and
Type PLTC Cables; Communications Raceways; and
Cable Routing Assemblies. Class 2, Class 3, and Type
PLTC cables and cables, nonmetallic signaling raceways
Change Description:
Revised to reflect nomenclature change from “signaling raceway”
to “communication raceway”.
Page 178 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
and cable routing assemblies installed as wiring methods
within buildings shall be listed as being resistant to the
spread of fire and other criteria in accordance with
725.179(A) through (K)(J) and shall be marked in accordance with 725.179(L).725.179 (K).
(I) Plenum Signaling Raceways. Plenum signaling raceways shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and
low smoke-producing characteristics.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3, and
Type PLTC Cables; Communications Raceways; and
Cable Routing Assemblies. Class 2, Class 3, and Type
PLTC cables and cables, nonmetallic signaling raceways
and cable routing assemblies installed as wiring methods
within buildings shall be listed as being resistant to the
spread of fire and other criteria in accordance with
725.179(A) through (K)(J) and shall be marked in accordance with 725.179(L).725.179 (K).
(JI) Riser Signaling Raceways.Cable Routing Assemblies. Riser signaling raceways cable routing assemblies
shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing the carrying of fire from floor to
floor.
Change Description:
Revised to reflect nomenclature change from “signaling raceway”
to “communication raceway” and addition of cable routing
assemblies.
725.179 Listing and Marking of Class 2, Class 3, and
Type PLTC Cables; Communications Raceways; and
Cable Routing Assemblies. Class 2, Class 3, and Type
PLTC cables and cables, nonmetallic signaling raceways
and cable routing assemblies installed as wiring methods
within buildings shall be listed as being resistant to the
spread of fire and other criteria in accordance with
725.179(A) through (K)(J) and shall be marked in accordance with 725.179(L).725.179 (K).
(KJ) General-Purpose Signaling Raceways.GeneralUse Cable Routing Assemblies. General-purpose signaling
racewaysGeneral-use cable routing assemblies shall be
listed as being resistant to the spread of fire.
Change Description:
Revised to reflect nomenclature change from “signaling raceway”
to “communication raceway” and addition of cable routing
assemblies.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 179 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ARTICLE 728
Fire-Resistive Cable Systems
Added a new Article. The text of this new article not
Change Description:
included for brevity.
This new articles provides installation requirements for fireresistive cable systems.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 750
Energy Management System
Added a new Article. The text of this new article not included
Change Description:
for brevity.
This new article provides requirements for installation and
operation of energy management systems.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
760.24 Mechanical Execution of Work.
(B) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable. Circuit in tegr ity
(CI) cables shall be supported at a distance not
exceeding 610 mm (24 in.). Where located within 2.1 m (7
ft) of the floor, as covered in 760.53(A)(1) and 760.130(1),
as appli- cable, the cable shall be fastened in an approved
manner at intervals of not more than 450 mm (18 in.). Cable
supports and fasteners shall be steel.
760.32 Fire Alarm Circuits Extending Beyond One
Building. PowerNon–power-limited fire alarm circuits and
power-limited fire alarm circuits that extend beyond one
building and run outdoors either shall meet the installation
ARTICLE 760
Fire Alarm Systems
Change Description:
This change correlates the installation requirements for CI cables
with UL 2196 testing for the cable.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
As a result of this change all non-power-limited and power-limited
signaling system circuits entering a building must be now
Page 180 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
requirements of Parts II, III, and IV of Article 800 or shall
meet the installation requirements of Part I of Article 300.
Non–power-limited fire alarm circuits that extend beyond
one building and run outdoors and shall meet the installation requirements of Part I of Article 300 and the applicable
sections of Part I of Article 225.
provided with transient protection. This change is consistent with
the changes to NFPA 72.
Impact(s) :
Improves safety of fire alarm circuits – no negative impact.
760.51 Number of Conductors in Cable Trays and
Raceways, and Ampacity Adjustment Factors.
(B) Power-Supply Conductors and Fire AlarmNPLFA
Circuit Conductors. Where power-supply conductors and
non–power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors are permitted in a raceway in accordance with 760.48, the number of
conductors shall be determined in accordance with 300.17.
The ampacity adjustment factors given in 310.15(B)(3)(a)
shall apply as follows:
Change Description:
Revised to clarify that this section applies only to non-power
limited circuits.
760.135 Installation of PLFA Cables in Buildings. Installation of power-limited fire alarm cables in buildings
shall comply with 760.135(A) through (J).
(The full text of the article is not included)
Change Description:
Added new section addressing installation of PLFA cables. This
is a companion change to the revision of Section 760.154,
separating application and installation rules in to two sections.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
760.154 Applications of Listed PLFA Cables. PLFA
cables shall comply with the requirements described in either 760.154(A), (B), or (C) Table 760.154 or where cable
substitutions are made as shown in 760.154(D)760.154(A).
Where substitute cables are installed, the wiring requirements of Article 760, Parts I and III, shall apply. Types
FPLP-CI, FPLR-CI, and FPL-CI cables shall be permitted
to be installed to provide 2-hour circuit integrity rated
cables.
(A) Plenum. Cables installed in ducts, plenums, and other
spaces used for environmental air shall be Type FPLP.
Types FPLP, FPLR, and FPL cables installed in compliance
Change Description:
Converted descriptive portion of this section to a table format
(Table 760.154). This is a companion change to the added
Section 760.135, separating application and installation rules in to
two sections.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 181 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
with 300.22 shall be permitted. Type FPLP-CI cable shall
be permitted to be installed to provide a 2-hour circuit
integrity rated cable.
(B) Riser. Cables installed in risers shall be as described in
either (1), (2), or (3):
(1) Cables installed in vertical runs and penetrating more
than one floor, or cables installed in vertical runs in a
shaft, shall be Type FPLR. Floor penetrations requiring
Type FPLR shall contain only cables suitable for riser
or plenum use. Type FPLR-CI cable shall be permitted
to be installed to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated
cable.
(2) Other cables shall be installed in metal raceways or
located in a fireproof shaft having firestops at each
floor.
(3) Type FPL cable shall be permitted in one- and twofamily dwellings.
Informational Note: See 300.21 for firestop requirements for
floor penetrations.
(C) Other Wiring Within Buildings. Cables installed in
building locations other than those covered in 760.154(A)
or (B) shall be as described in either (C)(1), (C)(2), (C)(3),
or (C)(4). Type FPL-CI cable shall be permitted to be installed as described in either (C)(1), (C)(2), (C)(3), or
(C)(4) to provide a 2-hour circuit integrity rated cable.
(1) General. Type FPL shall be permitted.
(2) In Raceways. Cables shall be permitted to be installed
in raceways.
(3) Nonconcealed Spaces. Cables specified in Chapter 3
and meeting the requirements of 760.179(A) and (B) shall
be permitted to be installed in nonconcealed spaces where
the exposed length of cable does not exceed 3 m (10 ft).
(4) Portable Fire Alarm System. A portable fire alarm
Page 182 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
system provided to protect a stage or set when not in use
shall be permitted to use wiring methods in accordance
with 530.12.
760.176 Listing and Marking of NPLFA Cables. Non–
power-limited fire alarm cables installed as wiring within
buildings shall be listed in accordance with 760.176(A) and
(B) and as being resistant to the spread of fire in accordance
with 760.176(C) through (F), and shall be marked in accordance with 760.176(G). Cable used in a wet location shall
be listed for use in wet locations or have a moistureimpervious metal sheath.
(F) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables that are used for
survivability of critical circuits shall be listed as circuit
integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in 760.176(C), (D),
and (E), and used for circuit integrity shall have the additional classification using the suffix “-CI.” Cables that are
part of a listed electrical circuit protective system shall be
considered to meet the requirements of survivability.under
fire conditions shall meet either 760.176(F)(1) or (F)(2) as
follows:
Change Description:
This change separates the two methods of establishing cable
survivability. Cable are either tested as a CI cable or tested as
part of an electrical circuit protective system. The new text
clarifies the two cable options and marking requirements.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Circuit integrity (CI)
cables, specified in 760.176(C), (D), and (E), and used for
survivability of critical circuits, shall have an additional
classification using the suffix “CI.” Circuit integrity (CI)
cables shall only be permitted to be installed in a raceway
where specifically listed and marked as part of an electrical
circuit protective system as covered in 760.176(F)(2).
(2) Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables specified
in 760.176(C), (D), (E), and (F)(1), that are part of an
electrical circuit protective system, shall be identified with
the protective system number and hourly rating printed on
the outer jacket of the cable and installed in accordance
with the listing of the protective system.
760.179 Listing and Marking of PLFA Cables and In-
Change Description:
Page 183 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
sulated Continuous Line-Type Fire Detectors. PLFA
cables installed as wiring within buildings shall be listed as
being resistant to the spread of fire and other criteria in
accordance with 760.179(A) through (H) and shall be
marked in accordance with 760.179(I). Insulated continuous line-type fire detectors shall be listed in accordance
with 760.179(J). Cable used in a wet location shall be listed
for use in wet locations or have a moisture-impervious
metal sheath.
(G) Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable or Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables that are used for
survivability of critical circuits shall be listed as circuit
integrity (CI) cable. Cables specified in 760.179(D), (E),
(F), and (H) and used for circuit integrity shall have the
additional classification using the suffix “-CI.” Cables that
are part of a listed electrical circuit protective system shall
be considered to meet the requirements of survivability.under fire conditions shall meet either 760.179(G)(1) or
(G)(2) as follows:
(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Circuit integrity (CI) cables
specified in 760.179(D), (E), (F), and (H), and used for
survivability of critical circuits, shall have an additional
classification using the suffix “CI.” Circuit integrity (CI)
cables shall only be permitted to be installed in a raceway
where specifically listed and marked as part of an electrical
circuit protective system as covered in 760.179(G)(2).
(2) Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables specified in
760.179(D), (E), (F), (H), and (G)(1), that are part of an
electrical circuit protective system, shall be identified with the
protective system number and hourly rating printed on the
outer jacket of the cable and installed in accordance with
the listing of the protective system.
This change separates the two methods of establishing cable
survivability. Cable are either tested as a CI cable or tested as
part of an electrical circuit protective system. The new text
clarifies the two cable options and marking requirements.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 770
Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways
770.3 Other Articles. Installations of optical fiber cables
Change Description:
Page 184 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
and raceways shall comply with 770.3(A) and (B). Only
those sections of Chapter 2 and Article 300 referenced in
this article shall apply to optical fiber cables and raceways.
(B) Cables in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor
Removal. The requirements of 300.22(A) for wiring systems shall apply to conductive optical fiber cables.
Added new subsection to provide requirements for optical fiber
cables, similar to Section 800.3.
770.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Optical fiber
cables shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
Cables installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and
sidewalls shall be supported by the building structure in
such a manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be secured by hardware
including straps, staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable.
The installation shall also conform with 300.4(D) and
300.11.300.4(D) through (G) and 300.11. Nonmetallic
cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories used to
secure and support cables in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums) shall be listed as having low smoke
and heat release properties.
Change Description:
Revised to correlate with requirements in NFPA 90A, providing
criteria for cable ties and accessories installed in plenums.
770.47 Underground Optical Fiber Cables Entering
Buildings. Underground optical fiber cables entering buildings shall comply with 770.47(A) and (B).
Change Description:
Added new section addressing underground optical fiber cables
entering buildings, similar to the sections in Articles 800, 820,
830, and 840.
(A) Underground Systems with Electric Light, Power,
Class 1, or Non–Power-Limited Fire Alarm Circuit
Conductors. Underground conductive optical fiber cables
entering buildings with electric light, power, Class 1, or
non– power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors in a raceway, handhole enclosure, or manhole shall be located in a
section separated from such conductors by means of brick,
concrete, or tile partitions or by means of a suitable barrier.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(B) Direct-Buried Cables and Raceways. Direct-buried
conductive optical fiber cables shall be separated by at least
300 mm (12 in.) from conductors of any electric light,
power, or non–power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors
Page 185 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
or Class 1 circuit.
Exception No. 1: Direct-buried conductive optical fiber
cables shall not be required to be separated by at least
300 mm (12 in.) from electric service conductors where
electric service conductors are installed in raceways or
have metal cable armor.
Exception No. 2: Direct-buried conductive optical fiber
cables shall not be required to be separated b y at
least 300 mm (12 in.) from electric light or power branchcircuit or feeder conductors, non–power-limited fire alarm
circuit conductors, or Class 1 circuit conductors where
electric light or power branch-circuit or feeder
conductors, non– power-limited fire alarm circuit
conductors, or Class 1 cir- cuit conductors are installed in
a raceway or in metal- sheathed, metal-clad, or Type UF
or Type USE cables.
770.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit Grounding. Rigid
metal conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC)
containing optical fiber entrance cable shall be connected
by a bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor
to a grounding electrode in accordance with 770.100(B).
Change Description:
Moved the definition containing a requirement to a new section to
comply with NEC Style Manual.
770.100 Entrance Cable Bonding and Grounding.
Where required, the non–current-carrying metallic members of optical fiber cables entering buildings shall be
bonded or grounded as specified in 770.100(A) through
(D).
Change Description:
Added new subsection, providing bonding and grounding
conductor length and protection requirements, similar to Articles
800, 820, and 830.
(A) Bonding Conductor or Grounding Electrode Conductor.
(4) Length. The bonding conductor or grounding electrode
conductor shall be as short as practicable. In one- and twofamily dwellings, the bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor shall be as short as practicable not to exceed 6.0 m (20 ft) in length.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 186 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Exception: In one- and two-family dwellings where it is not
practicable to achieve an overall maximum bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor length of 6.0 m
(20 ft), a separate ground rod meeting the minimum dimensional criteria of 770.100(B)(3)(2) shall be driven, the
grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the
separate ground rod in accordance with 770.100(C), and
the separate ground rod shall be bonded to the power
grounding electrode system in accordance with 770.100(D).
(56) Physical Damage.Protection. Where necessary, the
bonding conductor Bonding conductors and grounding
electrode conductors shall be guarded from protected where
exposed to physical damage. Where these conductors are
the bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor is
installed in a metal raceway, both ends of the raceway shall
be bonded to the contained conductors or to the same terminal or electrode to which the conductor(s) is (are)bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor is connected.
770.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies for
Optical Fiber Cables.
(A) Types of Raceways. Optical fiber cables shall be permitted to be installed in any raceway that complies with
either 770.110(A)(1) or (A)(2) and in cable routing assemblies installed in compliance with 770.110(C).
(2) Other PermittedCommunications Raceways. Optical
fiber cables shall be permitted to be installed in listed plenum optical fiber raceway, listed plenum communications
raceways, listed riser optical fiber raceway, listed riser communications raceway, listed general-purpose optical fiber
raceway, or raceways, and listed general-purpose communications raceways selected in accordance with the provisions
of 770.113, 800.110, and 800.113, and installed in accordance
with 362.24 through 362.56, where the requirements applicable to electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) apply.
770.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies for
Optical Fiber Cables.
Change Description:
This change is one of a series of changes simplifying types of
raceways specified in Articles 770, 800, and 820.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This added subsection provides installation rules for cable routing
Page 187 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. Optical fiber cables shall
be permitted to be installed in plenum cable routing assemlies, riser cable routing assemblies, and general-purpose
cable routing assemblies selected in accordance with the
provisions of 800.113 and Table 800.154(c) and installed in
accordance with 770.110(C)(1) and (C)(2).
assemblies.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) Horizontal Support. Cable routing assemblies shall be
supported where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed
900 mm (3 ft), and at each end or joint, unless listed for
other support intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports exceed 3 m (10 ft).
(2) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of cable routing assemblies shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m
(4 ft), unless listed for other support intervals, and shall not
have more than one joint between supports.
770.113 Installation of Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways, and Cable Routing Assemblies.Cables. Installation of
optical fiber cables and raceways, and cable routing assemblies shall comply with 770.113(A) through (J). Installation
of raceways shall also comply with 770.12 and 770.110.
Change Description:
This change is one of a series of changes simplifying types of
raceways specified in Articles 770, 800, and 820. This includes
deletion of Section 770.182.
(A) Listing. Optical fiber cables and raceways, and cable
routing assemblies installed in buildings shall be listed.
(C) Other Spaces Used For Environmental Air (Plenums). The following cables and raceways shall be permitted in other spaces used for environmental air as described
in 300.22(C):
(1) Types OFNP and OFCP cables
(2) Plenum optical fiber racewayTypes OFNP and OFCP
cables installed in plenum communications raceways
(3) Types OFNP and OFCP cables installed in plenum optical
fiber racewaysupported by open metallic cable trays or
plenum communications raceway cable tray systems
(4) Types OFNP and OFCP cables and plenum optical fiber
raceways supported by open metallic cable trays or cable
tray systemsOFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG,
OFCG, OFN, and OFC cables installed in raceways that are
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 188 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
installed in compliance with 300.22(C)
(5) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFCG,
OFN, and OFC cables installed in raceways that are
installed supported by solid bottom metal cable trays with
solid metal covers in other spaces used for environmental
air (plenums), in compliance with as described in
300.22(C)
(6) Types OFNP, OFCP, OFNR, OFCR, OFNG, OFCG,
OFN, and OFC cables and installed in plenum optical
fiber communications raceways, riser optical fiber raceways and communications raceways, or generalpurpose optical fiber communications raceways supported by solid bottom metal cable trays with solid metal
covers in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums),
as described in 300.22(C)
770.179 Optical Fiber Cables.
Optical fiber cables shall be listed in accordance with
770.179(A) through (E)(F) and shall be marked in
accordance with Table 770.179. Optical fiber cables shall
have a temperature rating of not less than 60°C (140°F).
(E) Optical Fiber Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables or Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables suitable for use
in systems to ensure that are used for survivability of critical circuits and pathways during a specified time under fire
conditions shall be additionally listed as circuit integrity
(CI) cable. Cables identified in 770.179(A) through (D) that
meet the requirements for circuit integrity shall have the
additional classification using the suffix “CI.”and meet either 770.179(E)(1) or (E)(2).
Change Description:
This change separates the two methods of establishing cable
survivability. Cable are either tested as a CI cable or tested as
part of an electrical circuit protective system. The new text
clarifies the two cable options and marking requirements.
The added subsection (F) covers marking and listing
requirements for field-assembled optical fiber cables.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
770.182 Optical Fiber Raceways and Cable Routing
Assemblies.(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Optical
fiber raceways and cable routing assemblies shall be listed
in accordance with 770.182(A) through (C). Circuit
integrity (CI) cables specified in 770.179(A) through (D),
and used for survivability of critical circuits, shall have an
additional classification using the suffix “CI.” In order to
Page 189 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
maintain its listed fire rating, circuit integrity (CI) cable
shall only be installed in free air.
(A) Plenum Optical Fiber Raceway. Plenum optical fiber
raceways shall be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and
low smoke-producing characteristics.
(B2) Riser Optical Fiber Raceways and Cable Routing
Assemblies. Fire-Resistive Cables. Riser optical fiber
raceways and riser cable routing assemblies shall be listed
as having fire-resistant characteristics capable of preventing
the carrying of fire from floor to floor. Cables specified in
770.179(A) through (D) and 770.179(E)(1), that are part of
an electrical circuit protective system, shall be fire-resistive
cable and identified with the protective system number on
the product or on the smallest unit container in which the
product is packaged and installed in accordance with the
listing of the protective system.
(C) General-Purpose Optical Fiber Cable Raceways
and Cable Routing Assemblies. General-purpose optical
fiber cable raceways and cable routing assemblies shall be
listed as being resistant to the spread of fire.
(F) Field-Assembled Optical Fiber Cables. Fieldassembled optical fiber cable shall comply with
770.179(F)(1) through (4).
(1) The specific combination of jacket and optical fibers
intended to be installed as a field- assembled optical
fiber cable shall be listed in accordance with
770.179(A), (B), or (D) and shall be marked in
accordance with Table 770.179.
(2) The jacket of a field-assembled optical fiber cable shall
have a surface marking indicating the specific optical
fibers with which it is listed for use.
(3) The optical fibers shall have a permanent marking, such
as a marker tape, indicating the jacket with which they
are listed for use.
(4) The jacket without fibers shall meet the listing
requirements for communications raceways in
800.182(A), (B), or (C) in accordance with the cable
marking.
Page 190 of 203
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
770.180 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath,
or non–current-carrying metallic members of a cable to a
bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor shall
be listed or be part of listed equipment.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for optical fiber cable
grounding devices to be listed or part of listed equipment.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 800
Communication Systems
800.12 Innerduct. Listed plenum communications raceway, listed riser communications raceway, and listed
general-purpose communications raceway selected in accordance with the provisions of Table 800.154(b) shall be
permitted to be installed as innerduct in any type of listed
raceway permitted in Chapter 3.
Change Description:
Added a new definition addressing use of raceways as an
innerduct in communication systems.
800.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Communications
circuits and equipment shall be installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner. Cables installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and sidewalls shall be supported by the
building structure in such a manner that the cable will not
be damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be
secured by hardware, including straps, staples, cable ties,
hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not
to damage the cable. The installation shall also conform to
300.4(D) and 300.11. Nonmetallic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories used to secure and support cables
in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums) shall
be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties.
800.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit Grounding. Rigid
metal conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC)
containing communications entrance wire or cable shall be
connected by a bonding conductor or grounding electrode
Change Description:
Revised to correlate with requirements in NFPA 90A, providing
criteria for cable ties and accessories installed in plenums.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Moved the definition containing a requirement to a new section to
comply with NEC Style Manual.
Page 191 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
conductor to a grounding electrode in accordance with
800.100(B).
800.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies for
Communications Wires and Cables.
(A) Types of Raceways. Communications wires and
cables shall be permitted to be installed in any raceway that
complies with either (A)(1) or (A)(2) and in cable routing
assemblies installed in compliance with 800.110(C).
(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. Communications wires
and cables shall be permitted to be installed in plenum
cable routing assemblies, riser cable routing assemblies,
and general-purpose cable routing assemblies selected in
accordance with the provisions of 800.113 and installed in
accordance with 800.110(C)(1) and (2).
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
This added subsection provides installation rules for cable routing
assemblies.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(1) Horizontal Support. Cable routing assemblies shall be
supported where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed
900 mm (3 ft), and at each end or joint, unless listed for
other support intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports exceed 3 m (10 ft).
(2) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of cable routing assemblies shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m
(4 ft), unless listed for other support intervals, and shall not
have more than one joint between supports.
800.113 Installation of Communications Wires, Cables
and Raceways, and Cable Routing Assemblies. Installation of communications wires, cables and raceways, and
cable routing assemblies shall comply with 800.113(A)
through (L). Installation of raceways and cable routing assemblies shall also comply with 800.110.
(A) Listing. Communications wires, communications
cables, communications raceways, and racewayscable routing assemblies installed in buildings shall be listed.
(C) Other Spaces Used for Environmental Air (Plenums). The following wires, cables, and raceways shall be
Change Description:
Expanded scope of the section to include cable routing
assemblies.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 192 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
permitted in other spaces used for environmental air as
described in 300.22(C):
(7) Types CMP, CMR, CMG, CM, and CMX cables installed in plenum communications raceways, riser communications raceways, and general-purpose communications raceways supported by solid bottom metal
cable trays with solid metal covers in other spaces used
for environmental air (plenums) as described in
300.22(C)
(D) Risers — Cables and Raceways in Vertical Runs.
The following cables, raceways, and raceways cable routing assemblies shall be permitted in vertical runs penetrating one or more floors and in vertical runs in a shaft:
(3) Plenum and riser cable routing assemblies
(F) Risers — Cables, Raceways, and RacewaysCable
Routing Assemblies in Fireproof Shafts. The following
cables, raceways, and raceways cable routing assemblies shall
be permitted to be installed in fireproof riser shafts having
firestops at each floor:
(3) Plenum, riser, and general-purpose cable routing assemblies
800.154 Applications of Listed Communications Wires,
Cables and Raceways, and Listed Cable Routing Assemblies. Permitted and nonpermitted applications of listed
communications wires, cables, and raceways, and listed cable
routing assemblies, shall be in accordance with one of the
following:
(1) Listed communications wires and cables as indicated in
Table 800.154(a).
(2) Listed communications raceways as indicated in Table
800.154(b)
(3) Listed cable routing assemblies as indicated in Table
800.154(c)
Change Description:
Expanded scope of the section to include cable routing
assemblies.
800.170 Equipment. Communications equipment shall be
listed as being suitable for electrical connection to a communications network.
(C) Plenum Grade Cable Ties. Cable ties intended for
Change Description:
Revised to correlate with requirements in NFPA 90A, providing
criteria for cable ties and accessories installed in plenums.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 193 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
use in other space used for environmental air (plenums)
shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties.
G) Communications Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables or
Electrical Circuit Protective System. Cables suitable for
use in communications systems to ensure that are used for
survivability of critical circuits during a specified time under fire conditions shall be listed as circuit integrity (CI)
cable. Cables identified in 800.179(A) through (E) that and
meet the requirements for circuit integrity shall have the
additional classification using the suffix “CI.”either
800.179(G)(1) or (2) as follows:
(1) Circuit Integrity (CI) Cables. Circuit integrity (CI)
cables specified in 800.179(A) through (E), and used for
survivability of critical circuits, shall have an additional
classification using the suffix “CI.” In order to maintain its
listed fire rating, circuit integrity (CI) cable shall only be
installed in free air.
(2) Fire-Resistive Cables. Cables specified in 800.179(A)
through (E) and 800.179(G)(1), that are part of an electrical
circuit protective system, shall be fire-resistive cable identified with the protective system number on the product, or
on the smallest unit container in which the product is packaged, and shall be installed in accordance with the listing of
the protective system.
Also, the change in subsection (G) separates the two methods of
establishing cable survivability. Cable are either tested as a CI
cable or tested as part of an electrical circuit protective system.
The new text clarifies the two cable options and marking
requirements.
800.180 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath,
or non–current-carrying metallic members of a cable to a
bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor shall
be listed or be part of listed equipment.
(A) Plenum Communications Raceways and Plenum
Cable Routing Assemblies. Plenum communications raceways and plenum cable routing assemblies listed as plenum
optical fiber raceways shall be permitted for use in ducts,
plenums, and other spaces used for environmental air and
shall also be listed as having adequate fire-resistant and low
smoke-producing characteristics.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for communication
circuits grounding devices to be listed or part of listed equipment.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 194 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
ARTICLE 810
Radio and Television Equipment
810.6 Antenna Lead-In Protectors. Where an antenna
Change Description:
lead-in surge protector is installed, it shall be listed as being
Antenna lead-in protectors may be subject to high energy
suitable for limiting surges on the cable that connects the
lightning surges in the range of 5-50 kA or higher. Listing and
antenna to the receiver/transmitter electronics and shall be
compliance with appropriate requirements ensure that the
connected between the conductors and the grounded shield
protector can withstand these surges without introducing a risk of
or other ground connection. The antenna lead-in protector
shall be grounded using a bonding conductor or grounding
fire or personal injury (from explosions) and also that the
electrode conductor installed in accordance with 810.21(F).
protector will continue to provide surge protection after being
subjected to various environmental and surge conditions that may
be expected in an typical installation.
2
Impact(s) :
Improves safety - no negative impact.
810.7 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is
required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath, non–
current-carrying metallic members of a cable, or metal
parts of equipment or antennas to a bonding conductor or
grounding electrode conductor shall be listed or be part of
listed equipment.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for Radio and
television equipment grounding devices to be listed or part of
listed equipment.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 820
Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution Systems
820.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comChange Description:
ply with 820.3(A) through (G).(J).
Added references to Section 300.22 for community antenna
(B) Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor
television and radio distribution wiring systems installed in ducts
Removal. The requirements of 300.22(A) shall apply.
and other spaces used for environmental air.
(C) Equipment in Other Space Used for Environmental
Air. The requirements of 300.22(C)(3) shall apply.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 195 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
820.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. Community television and radio distribution systems shall be installed in a
neat and workmanlike manner. Coaxial cables installed exposed on the surface of ceiling and sidewalls shall be supported by the building structure in such a manner that the
cables will not be damaged by normal building use. Such
cables shall be secured by hardware including straps,
staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings designed and
installed so as not to damage the cable. The installation
shall also conform to 300.4(D) and 300.11. Nonmetallic
cable ties and other nonmetallic cable accessories used to
secure and support cables in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums) shall be listed as having low smoke
and heat release properties.
Change Description:
Revised to correlate with requirements in NFPA 90A, providing
criteria for cable ties and accessories installed in plenums.
820.47 Underground Coaxial Cables Entering Buildings. Underground coaxial cables entering buildings shall
comply with 820.47(A) and (B).
(A) Underground Systems with Electric Light and
Power, Power, Class 1, or Non–Power-Limited Fire
Alarm Circuit Conductors. Underground coaxial cables
in a duct, pedestal, handhole enclosure, or manhole that
contains electric light, power, or power conductorsClass 1
or Class 1 circuitsnon–power-limited fire alarm circuit conductors shall be in a section permanently separated from
such conductors by means of a suitable barrier.
Change Description:
This change addresses non-power-limited fire alarm circuits
missing from this section.
820.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit Grounding. Rigid
metal conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC)
containing entrance coaxial cable shall be connected by a
bonding conductor or grounding electrode conductor to a
grounding electrode in accordance with 820.100(B).
Change Description:
Moved the definition containing a requirement to a new section to
comply with NEC Style Manual.
820.100 Cable Bonding and Grounding. The shield of
the coaxial cable shall be bonded or grounded as specified
in 820.100(A) through (D).
Change Description:
Correlates with similar requirements in Articles 770, 800, and
830, not allowing the use of steam or hot water pipes as
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 196 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
(3) In Buildings or Structures Without an Intersystem
Bonding Termination or Grounding Means. If the building or structure served has no intersystem bonding termination or grounding means, as described in 820.100(B)(2),
the grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to
either of the following:
(2) If the building or structure served has no intersystem
bonding termination or grounding means, as described
in 820.100(B)(2) or (B)(3)(1), to any one of the individual grounding electrodes described in 250.52(A)(5),
(A)(7), and (A)(8). Steam or hot water pipes or air
terminal conductors (lightning-rod conductors) shall
not be employed as grounding electrodes for bonding
conductors or grounding electrode conductors.
grounding electrodes.
820.110 Raceways and Cable Routing Assemblies for
Coaxial Cables.
(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. Coaxial cables shall be
permitted to be installed in plenum cable routing assemblies, riser cable routing assemblies, and general-purpose
cable routing assemblies selected in accordance with the
provisions of 800.113 and installed in accordance with
820.110(C)(1) and (2).
(1) Horizontal Support. Cable routing assemblies shall be
supported where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed
900 mm (3 ft), and at each end or joint, unless listed for
other support intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports exceed 3 m (10 ft)
(2) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of cable routing assemblies shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m
(4 ft), unless listed for other support intervals, and shall not
have more than one joint between supports.
Change Description:
This added subsection provides installation rules for cable routing
assemblies.
820.113 Installation of Coaxial Cables. Installation of coaxial cables shall comply with 820.113(A) through (K).
Installation of raceways shall comply with 820.110.
(C) Other Spaces Used For Environmental Air (Plenums). The following cables shall be permitted in other
Change Description:
This change establishes listing requirements for community
antenna television and radio distribution system cables installed
in other spaces used for environmental air (plenums).
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 197 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
spaces used for environmental air as described in
300.22(C):
(6) Types CATVP, CATVR, CATV, and CATVX cables installed in plenum communications raceways, riser communications raceways, or general-purpose communications raceways supported by solid bottom metal cable trays
with solid metal covers in other spaces used for
environmental air (plenums) as described in 300.22(C)
820.180 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath,
or non–current-carrying metallic members of a cable to a
bonding conductor, or grounding electrode conductor, shall
be listed or be part of listed equipment.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for community
antenna television and radio distribution system equipment
grounding devices to be listed or part of listed equipment.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 830
Network-Powered Broadband Communications Systems
830.3 Other Articles. Circuits and equipment shall comChange Description:
ply with 830.3(A) through (F).(G).
Added references to Section 300.22 for network-powered
B) Wiring in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor
broadband communication wiring systems installed in ducts for
Removal. The requirements of 300.22(A) shall apply.
dust, loose stock, or vapor removal.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
830.24 Mechanical Execution of Work. NetworkChange Description:
powered broadband communications circuits and equipRevised to correlate with requirements in NFPA 90A, providing
ment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
criteria for cable ties and accessories installed in plenums.
Cables installed exposed on the surface of ceilings and
sidewalls shall be supported by the building structure in
such a manner that the cable will not be damaged by normal building use. Such cables shall be secured by hardware
including straps, staples, cable ties, hangers, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage the cable.
The installation shall also conform to 300.4(D) and 300.11.
Nonmetallic cable ties and other nonmetallic cable acces-
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 198 of 203
2
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
sories used to secure and support cables in other spaces
used for environmental air (plenums) shall be listed as having low smoke and heat release properties.
830.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit Grounding. Rigid
metal conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC)
containing network-powered broadband communications
entrance cable shall be connected by a bonding conductor
or grounding electrode conductor to a grounding electrode in accordance with 830.100(B).
Change Description:
Moved the definition containing a requirement to a new section to
comply with NEC Style Manual.
830.110 Raceways for Low- and Medium-Powerand
Cable Routing Assemblies for Network-Powered Broadband Communications Cables.
(A) Types of Raceways. Low-power network-powered
broadband communications cables shall be permitted to be
installed in any raceway that complies with either
830.110(A)(1) or (A)(2) and in cable routing assemblies
installed in compliance with 830.110(C). Medium-power
network-powered broadband communications cables shall
be permitted to be installed in any raceway that complies
with 830.110(A)(1).
Change Description:
The change corrects an oversight in the 2011 NEC.
Table 830.154(a) and 830.113 permit low-power networkpowered communications cables to be installed in
communications raceways, but communications raceways were
omitted from this section.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
(2) Communications Raceways. Low-power networkpowered broadband communications cables shall be permitted to be installed in listed plenum communications
raceways, listed riser communications raceways, and listed
general-purpose communications raceways, selected in accordance with the provisions of 800.113 and 830.113 and
installed in accordance with 362.24 through 362.56, where
the requirements applicable to electrical nonmetallic tubing
apply.
830.110 Raceways for Low- and Medium-Powerand
Cable Routing Assemblies for Network-Powered Broadband Communications Cables.
(C) Cable Routing Assemblies. Network-powered broad-
Change Description:
This added subsection provides installation rules for cable routing
assemblies.
Page 199 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
band communications cables shall be permitted to be installed in plenum cable routing assemblies, riser cable routing assemblies, and general-purpose cable routing
assemblies selected in accordance with the provisions of
800.113 and installed in accordance with 830.110(C)(1)
and (2).
(1) Horizontal Support. Cable routing assemblies shall be
supported where run horizontally at intervals not to exceed
900 mm (3 ft), and at each end or joint, unless listed for
other support intervals. In no case shall the distance between supports exceed 3 m (10 ft).
(2) Vertical Support. Vertical runs of cable routing assemblies shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.2 m
(4 ft), unless listed for other support intervals, and shall not
have more than one joint between supports.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
830.113 Installation of Network-Powered Broadband
Communications Cables. Installation of network-powered
broadband communications cables shall comply with
830.113(A) through (H).
(C) Other Spaces Used For Environmental Air (Plenums). The following cables shall be permitted in other
spaces used for environmental air as described in
300.22(C):
(6) Types BLP, BMR, BLR, BM, BL, and BLX cables
installed in plenum communications raceways, riser
communications raceways, or general-purpose communications raceways supported by solid bottom metal
cable trays with solid metal covers in other spaces used
for environmental air (plenums) as described in
300.22(C)
Change Description:
This change establishes listing requirements for network-powered
broadband communication cables installed in other spaces used
for environmental air (plenums).
830.180 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath,
or non–current-carrying metallic members of a cable to a
bonding conductor, or grounding electrode conductor, shall
be listed or be part of listed equipment.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for network-powered
broadband communication cables grounding devices to be listed
or part of listed equipment.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Impact(s) :
Page 200 of 203
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
No negative impact.
ARTICLE 840
Premises-Powered Broadband Communications Systems
840.3 Other Articles.
Change Description:
(B) Cables in Ducts for Dust, Loose Stock, or Vapor
Added new subsection to provide requirements for optical fiber
Removal. The requirements of 300.22(A) for wiring syscables, similar to Section 800.3.
tems shall apply to conductive optical fiber cables.
(D) Installation and Use. The requirements of 110.3(B)
shall apply.
840.49 Metallic Entrance Conduit Grounding. The requirements of 770.49 shall apply.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added reference to Section 770.49 for metallic entrance conduit
grounding.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
840.93 Grounding or Interruption. Non–current-carrying
metallic members of optical fiber cables, communications
cables, or coaxial cables entering buildings or attaching to
buildings shall comply with 840.93(A), (B), or (C), respectively.
Change Description:
Editorial change, consistent with NEC Style Manual.
840.103 Equipment Grounding. The grounding of the
ONT shall be as required by the equipment listing.
Change Description:
Deleted redundant section – grounding requirements are covered
840.101(C).
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
New section added to address requirements for premisespowered broadband communication cables grounding devices to
be listed or part of listed equipment.
840.180 Grounding Devices. Where bonding or grounding is required, devices used to connect a shield, a sheath,
or non–current-carrying metallic members of a cable to a
bonding conductor, or grounding electrode conductor, shall
be listed or be part of listed equipment.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 201 of 203
1
2
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Table 1 Percent of Cross Section of Conduit and Tubing for
Conductors and Cables
Notes to Tables
(6) For combinations of conductors of different sizes, use
actual dimensions or Table 5 and Table 5A for dimensions of conductors and Table 4 for the applicable conduit or tubing dimensions.
Table 1 Percent of Cross Section of Conduit and Tubing for
Conductors and Cables
Notes to Tables
(7) When calculating the maximum number of conductors or
cables permitted in a conduit or tubing, all of the same
size (total cross-sectional area including insulation), the
next higher whole number shall be used to determine the
maximum number of conductors permitted when the calculation results in a decimal of 0.8 or larger.greater than
or equal to 0.8. When calculating the size for conduit or
tubing permitted for a single conductor, one conductor
shall be permitted when the calculation results in a decimal greater than or equal to 0.8.
Table 1 Percent of Cross Section of Conduit and Tubing for
Conductors and Cables
Notes to Tables
(10) The values for approximate conductor diameter and area
shown in Table 5 are based on worst-case scenario and
indicate round concentric-lay-stranded conductors. Solid
and round concentric-lay-stranded conductor values are
grouped together for the purpose of Table 5. Round
compact-stranded conductor values are shown in Table
5A. If the actual values of the conductor diameter and
CHAPTER 9
Tables
Change Description:
Since not all conductor sizes are covered in the referenced
tables, the code was changed to allow use of actual dimensions
of the conductors in calculating conduit and tubing fill.
2
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Editorial change.
1
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Change Description:
Added a new note clarifying the data provided in Tables 5 and
5A.
Impact(s) :
No negative impact.
Page 202 of 203
1
Technical Evaluation of the Changes in NFPA 70 between 2011 and 2014 Editions
Attachment #4 - Comparison Table
area are known, they shall be permitted to be used.
Page 203 of 203